MODEL NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110 NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J NP216+/NP215+/NP210+/NP115+/NP110+
Portable Projector
SERVICE MANUAL
PART No. 3N9911161 (1st Edition)
Better Service Better Reputation Better Profit
Copyright
Cautions for Maintenance Service
1. Contents
2. Safety precautions
3. User's manual
4. Troubleshooting
5. Method of adjustments
6. Serviceman mode
7. Cleaning
8. Circuit sescrition
9. Method of disassembly
10. Disassembly
11. Packaging
12. Part list
13. Connection diagram
14. Block diagram
15. Schematic diagrams
Back cover SAFETY CAUTION: Before servicing this chassis, it is important that the service technician read and follow the “Safety Precautions” and “Product Safety Notice” in this Service Manual. WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD - Use an isolation transformer when servicing.
NEC DISPLAY SOLUTIONS, LTD.
(1)
Copyright (C) NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. All Rights Reserved. This document contains confidential information. Unauthorized copying, duplication, distribution, or republication is strictly prohibited.
(2)
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
Cautions for Maintenance Services 1. How to start the set under the condition that the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are removed The Lamp Cover switch (COVER PWB ASSY) of this model is mounted on the top of the Power Case. The set cannot be started if the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are left removed. This is because the Lamp Cover switch can be turned OFF only if the LAMP COVER ASSY is removed. Follow the steps shown below when intending to start up the set under the condition that the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are removed. 1 Provide for carton (or cardboard paper) Length: 30 ~ 40 (mm), Depth: 50 ~ 60 (mm), Thickness: 2 ~ 3 (mm)
2 Insert the carton (or cardboard paper) in the right side of the Lamp Cover switch. (Insert it along the Lamp Cover switch.)
ON by PUSH
LAMP COVER SWITCH
Insert the carton Insert it in the red frame section.
Caution: Under the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY and LAMP COVER ASSY are removed, the set can be started by the method described above. However, the set cannot be started under the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY only is mounted and the LAMP COVER ASSY is removed.
2. Cautions for the installation of LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY When installing the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY on the set, the TOP COVER ASSY only should be mounted first. Then, the LAMP COVER ASSY can be mounted. If the installation work is carried out in the state that the LAMP COVER ASSY is mounted on the TOP COVER ASSY, the Lamp Cover switch may be damaged by the embossed part of the LAMP COVER ASSY.
CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.................................................................................................................................... 2-1 USERS MANUAL ..................................................................................................................................................1 Important Information (U) Quick Setup Guide (U/G) Quic Setup Guide (G2) TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................................................................... 4-1 Operational checks.......................................................................................................................................... 4-1 Power block..................................................................................................................................................... 4-2 I/O Sync and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110).......................................................... 4-3 I/O Sync and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP216)............................................................................................ 4-5 DMD Driver Block............................................................................................................................................ 4-8 AWired LAN................................................................................................................................................... 4-10 Audio block (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110)..............................................................................4-11 Audio block (Applicable to NP216)................................................................................................................ 4-12 METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS............................................................................................................................ 5-1 PC control software for service....................................................................................................................... 5-1 Model-Specific Data Writing Procedure for NP215 Series............................................................................ 5-16 Optical Adjustment........................................................................................................................................ 5-22 SERVICEMAN MODE.......................................................................................................................................... 6-1 CLEANING........................................................................................................................................................... 7-1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................................................... 8-1 I/O terminals (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110).............................................................................. 8-1 I/O terminals (Applicable to NP216)................................................................................................................ 8-1 Input signals.................................................................................................................................................... 8-2 Circuit operation.............................................................................................................................................. 8-3 A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110).............................................. 8-6 A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP216)................................................................................ 8-7 Power Up Sequence....................................................................................................................................... 8-8 METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY............................................................................................................................. 9-1 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................................................................. 10-1 Main body (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115NP110).............................................................................. 10-1 Main body (Applicable to NP216)................................................................................................................. 10-2 Engine sassy................................................................................................................................................. 10-3 PACKAGING.......................................................................................................................................................11-1 PART LIST......................................................................................................................................................... 12-1 NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110........................................................................................................................ 12-1 NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G.............................................................................................. 12-6 NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J..................................................................................................12-11 CONNECTION DIAGRAM................................................................................................................................. 13-1 BLOCK DIAGRAM............................................................................................................................................. 14-1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS.................................................................................................................................. 15-1
1-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may have sufficient magnitude to cause electric shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of this unit.
This symbol alerts the user that important literature concerning the operation and maintenance of this unit has been included. Therefore, it should be read carefully in order to avoid any problems.
ATTENTION RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION NE PAS OUVRIR
MISE EN GARDE: AFIN DE REDUIRE LES RISQUES D' ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS DEPOSER LE COUVERCLE, IL N'Y A AUCUNE PIECE UTILISABLE A L'INTERIEUR DE CET APPAREIL. NE CONFIER LES TRAVAUX D'ENTRETIEN QU'A UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE. Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir I' utilisateur de la présence d' une tension dangereuse, non isolée se trouvant à l' intérieur de l' appareil. Elle est d' une intensité suffisante pour constituer un risque d' électrocution. Eviter le contact avec les pièces à l' intérieur de cet appareil. Ce symbole a pour but de prévenir l' utilisateur de la présence d' importantes instructions concernant l' entretien et le fonctionnement de cet appareil. Par conséquent, elles doivent être lues attentivement afin d' éviter des problèmes.
WARNING HEATSINK MAY BE ENERGIZED. TEST BEFORE TOUCHING. Heat sink located on the power board, is electrified. mark is putted on the primary heat sink. Pay attention to this area.
2-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS During servicing carefully observe the following. 1. OBSERVE ALL PRECAUTIONS Items and locations that require special care during serv-icing, such as the cabinet, chassis, and parts are labelled with individual safety instructions. Carefully comply with these instructions and all precautions in the instruction manual. 2. BE CAREFUL OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The chassis carries an AC voltage. If you touch the chassis while it is still alive, you will get a severe shock. If you think the chassis is alive, use an isolating transformer or gloves, or pull out the plug before replacing any parts. 3. USE SPECIFIED PARTS The components have been chosen for minimum flammability and for specific levels of resistance value and withstand voltage. Replacement parts must match these original specifications. Parts whose specifications are particularly vital to safe use and maintenance of the set are marked on the circuit diagrams and parts list. Substitution of these parts can be dangerous for you and the customer, so use only specified parts. 4. REMOUNT ALL PARTS AND RECONNECT ALL WIRES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED For safety, insulating tape and tubes are used throughout, but some lift-off parts on the printed wiring board require special attention. All wires are positioned away from high-temperature and high-voltage parts, and, if removed for servicing, they must be retuned precisely to their original positions.
5. LAMP Be very careful of the lamp because it generates high heat while it is used at high voltage. When replacing the bulb, make sure it is cool enough. 6. LENS Do not look into the lens during projection. This important to avoid damage to the eyes. 7. SERVICING At the time of repair or inspection services, use an earth band (wrist band), without fail. 8. RUN A COMPLETE SAFETY CHECK AT THE COMPLETION OF SERVICING Afte r co mp l e ti o n o f se rvi ci n g , co n fi rm th a t a ll screws, parts, and wiring, removed or disconnected for servicing, have been returned to their original positions. Also examine if the serviced sections and peripheral areas have suffered from any deterioration as a result of servicing. In addition, check insulation between external metallic parts and blades of walloutlet plugs. This examination is indispensable in confirming complete establishment of safety. (Insulation check) Pull out a plug from a wall outlet to disconnect the connection cable. Then turn on the POWER switch. Use a 500V megger (Note 2) and confirm that the insulation resistance is 1MΩ or more between each terminal of the plug and exposed external metal (Note 1). If the measured value is below the specified level, then it is necessary to inspect and fix the set. (Note 1) Exposed external metal....RGB input terminals, control terminals, etc. (Note 2) If a 500V megger is not available for an unavoidable reason, then use a circuit tester or the like for inspection.
2-2
Portable Projector
NP216/NP215/NP210/ NP115/NP110 User’s Manual
The NP210 is not distributed in North America.
3rd edition, April 2010
• DLP and BrilliantColor are trademarks of Texas Instruments. • IBM is a trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Macintosh, Mac OS X and PowerBook are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • Microsoft, Windows, Windows 7, Windows Vista, and PowerPoint are either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. • MicroSaver is a registered trademark of Kensington Computer Products Group, a division of ACCO Brands. • XPAND is a trademark of X6D Ltd. • Other product and company names mentioned in this user’s manual may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. NOTES (1) The contents of this user’s manual may not be reprinted in part or whole without permission. (2) The contents of this user’s manual are subject to change without notice. (3) Great care has been taken in the preparation of this user’s manual; however, should you notice any questionable points, errors or omissions, please contact us. (4) Notwithstanding article (3), NEC will not be responsible for any claims on loss of profit or other matters deemed to result from using the Projector.
Important Information Safety Cautions Precautions Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet. The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily accessible. CAUTION TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET. THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit. This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this unit has been provided. The information should be read carefully to avoid problems. WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only) This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV, The highest sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) in accordance with EN ISO 7779.
Disposing of your used product EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This includes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product. After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human health and the environment at the minimum level. The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member States.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS: Handling the cables supplied with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
i
Important Information RF Interference (for USA only) WARNING The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those specified by NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regulation could void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation • Do not place the projector in the following conditions: - on an unstable cart, stand, or table. - near water, baths, or damp rooms. - in direct sunlight, near heaters, or heat radiating appliances. - in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment. - on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets. • If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling: - Do not attempt to install the projector yourself. - The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily injury. - In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes. - Please consult your dealer for more information.
WARNING • Do not cover the lens with the lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of the cap due to the heat emitted from the light output. • Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens. Doing so could lead to the object melting from the heat that is emitted from the light output.
ii
Important Information Place the projector in a horizontal position The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other than the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10˚
Fire and Shock Precautions • Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall. • Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the front side as it can become heated while the projector is turned on and immediately after the projector is turned off.
• Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver into your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object removed by a qualified service personnel. • Do not place any objects on top of the projector. • Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire. • The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector. • Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result. • Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes. • Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of a projector exhaust vent.
Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the exhaust.
• Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or fire. - Do not use any power cables than the supplied one. - Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively. - Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object. - Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs. - Do not heat the power cable. - Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. • Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the projector serviced by a qualified service personnel under the following conditions: - When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed. - If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.
iii
Important Information - If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user's manual. - If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. - If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. • Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector. • Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp. • Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable if the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time. • When using a LAN cable (NP216/NP215 only):
For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage. CAUTION • Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector. • Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside the soft case could be damaged. • Select [HIGH] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select [SETUP] → [OPTIONS(1)] → [FAN MODE] → [HIGH].) • Do not turn off the AC power for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blinking green. Doing so could cause premature lamp failure. • Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation. Use caution when picking up the projector.
Remote Control Precautions • Handle the remote control carefully. • If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately. • Avoid excessive heat and humidity. • Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire. • If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries. • Ensure that you have the batteries' polarity (+/–) aligned correctly. • Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together. • Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Lamp Replacement • Use the specified lamp for safety and performance. • To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page 70. • Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE. PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury.
If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.
A Lamp Characteristic The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source. A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.
iv
Important Information CAUTION: • DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before handling. • When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.
Note for US Residents The lamp in this product contains mercury. Please dispose according to Local, State or Federal Laws. Health precautions to users viewing 3D images Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the user’s manual included with your LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video files and the like. To avoid any adverse symptoms, heed the following: - Do not use LCD shutter eyeglasses for viewing any material other than 3D images. - Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close a distance can strain your eyes. - Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every hour of viewing. - If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing 3D images. - While viewing 3D images, if you get sick such as nausea, dizziness, queasiness, headache, eyestrain, blurry vision, convulsions, and numbness, stop viewing them. If symptoms still persist, consult a doctor.
About High Altitude mode • Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher. • Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. • Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO]. • Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical components such as the lamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures: Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with the following functions may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law. [ASPECT RATIO], [KEYSTONE], Magnifying feature and other similar features.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market EEE Yonetmeliğine Uygundur. This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid incommoding reflections at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct field of view.
v
Table of Contents Important Information. ...........................................................................................i Table of Contents....................................................................................................vi 1. Introduction........................................................................................................... 1 1 What’s in the Box?.......................................................................................................... 1 Introduction to the Projector........................................................................................... 2 Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector.................................................. 2 Features you'll enjoy:................................................................................................ 2 About this user's manual........................................................................................... 3 Part Names of the Projector........................................................................................... 4 Front/Top................................................................................................................... 4 Rear.......................................................................................................................... 4 Top Features............................................................................................................. 5 Terminal Panel Features........................................................................................... 6 Part Names of the Remote Control................................................................................ 7 Battery Installation.................................................................................................... 8 Remote Control Precautions..................................................................................... 8 Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control......................................................... 8
2. Installation and Connections...................................................................... 9 Setting Up the Screen and the Projector........................................................................ 9 Selecting a Location................................................................................................. 9 Throw Distance and Screen Size............................................................................ 10 Making Connections..................................................................................................... 12 Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer.......................................................... 12 Connecting an External Monitor............................................................................. 13 Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output............................................ 14 Connecting Your VCR............................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a Network (NP216/NP215 only)...................................................... 16 Connecting the Supplied Power Cable................................................................... 17
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)............................................... 18 Turning on the Projector............................................................................................... 18 Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)....................................... 19 Selecting a Source....................................................................................................... 20 Selecting the computer or video source................................................................. 20 Adjusting the Picture Size and Position........................................................................ 21 Adjust the Tilt Foot.................................................................................................. 22 Zoom....................................................................................................................... 23 Focus...................................................................................................................... 23 Correcting Keystone Distortion..................................................................................... 24 Correcting Keystone Distortion............................................................................... 24 Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet..................................................................... 24 Adjusting with the remote control............................................................................ 25 Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically.................................................................. 26 Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust................................................................... 26 Turning Up or Down Volume......................................................................................... 26
vi
Table of Contents 7 Turning off the Projector............................................................................................... 27 After Use...................................................................................................................... 28
4. Convenient Features. .................................................................................... 29 1 Turning off the Image and Sound................................................................................. 29 2 Freezing a Picture........................................................................................................ 29 Enlarging a Picture....................................................................................................... 29 Changing Eco Mode..................................................................................................... 30 5 Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER].................................................... 31 6 Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]....................................... 32 7 Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR)............................................. 35 8 Network Setting by Using an HTTP Browser (NP216/NP215 only).............................. 37 Viewing 3D Images....................................................................................................... 40
5. Using On-Screen Menu. ............................................................................... 43 Using the Menus........................................................................................................... 43 2 Menu Elements............................................................................................................. 44 3 List of Menu Items........................................................................................................ 45 4 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]................................................................. 47 5 Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST]................................................................... 48 6 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]..................................................................... 55 7 Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]....................................................................... 66 8 Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]..................................................................... 68 6. Maintenance....................................................................................................... 69 Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens.............................................................................. 69 Replacing the Lamp..................................................................................................... 70
7. Appendix............................................................................................................... 73 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................ 73 Indicator Messages................................................................................................. 73 Specifications............................................................................................................... 76 Cabinet Dimensions..................................................................................................... 78 Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector........................................... 79 Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector................................................................................. 79 Compatible Input Signal List......................................................................................... 80 PC Control Codes and Cable Connection.................................................................... 81 PC Control Codes................................................................................................... 81 Cable Connection................................................................................................... 81 PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)......................................................................... 81 Troubleshooting Check List........................................................................................... 82 TravelCare Guide.......................................................................................................... 84
vii
1. Introduction 1 What’s in the Box? Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer. Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector. Projector
Lens cap (24F45801)
Power cable (US: 7N080236) (EU: 7N080022)
Remote control (7N900881)
VGA signal cable (7N520073)
Batteries (AAAx2)
For North America only Registration card Limited warranty
For North America Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731) Important Information (7N8N0752)
NEC Projector CD-ROM User’s manual (7N951472)
For other countries than North America Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731 and 7N8N0741) Important Information (7N8N0752 and 7N8N0762)
1
For customers in Europe: You will find our current valid Guarantee Policy on our Web Site: www.nec-display-solutions.com
1. Introduction
Introduction to the Projector This section introduces you to your new projector and describes the features and controls.
Congratulations on Your Purchase of the Projector This DLP® projector is one of the very best projectors available today. The projector enables you to project precise images up to 300 inches (measured diagonally) from your PC or Macintosh computer (desktop or notebook), VCR, DVD player or document camera. You can use the projector on a tabletop or cart, you can use the projector to project images from behind the screen, and the projector can be permanently mounted on a ceiling*1. The remote control can be used wirelessly. *1 Do not attempt to mount the projector on a ceiling yourself.
The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily injury.
In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes. Please consult your dealer for more information.
Features you'll enjoy: • Quick start & Quick Power Off
7 seconds after turning on the power, the projector is ready to display PC or video images.
The projector can be put away immediately after the projector is powered down. No cool down period is required after the projector is turned off from the remote control or cabinet control panel.
• Direct Power Off
The projector has a feature called “Direct Power Off”. This feature allows the projector to be turned off (even when projecting an image) by disconnecting the AC power supply.
To turn off the AC power supply when the projector is powered on, use a power strip equipped with a switch and a breaker.
• Less than 1W in standby condition with energy saving technology
Selecting [POWER-SAVING] for [STANDBY MODE] from the menu can put the projector in power-saving mode that consumes only 0.49W (100-130V AC)/0.71W (200-240V AC).
• Carbon Meter
This feature will show energy-saving effect in terms of CO2 emission reduction (kg) when the projector’s [ECO MODE] is set to [ON].
The amount of CO2 emission reduction will be displayed in the confirmation message at the time of power-off and in the INFO of the on-screen menu.
• 7W built-in speaker for an integrated audio solution
Powerful 7 watt speaker provides volume need for large rooms.
• Two computer inputs provided (NP216 only)
The NP216 projector comes with two computer input ports (Mini D-Sub15P) with audio inputs (two stereo mini jacks) as well as composite and S-video inputs with audio inputs (a pair of L/R RCA jacks).
• DLP® projector with high resolution and high brightness
High resolution display - up to UXGA compatible, XGA (NP216/NP215/NP210)/ SVGA (NP115/NP110) native resolution.
• AUTO POWER ON and AUTO POWER OFF features
The AUTO POWER ON(AC), AUTO POWER ON(COMP.), AUTO POWER OFF, and OFF TIMER features eliminate the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or projector cabinet.
2
1. Introduction • Preventing unauthorized use of the projector
Enhanced smart security settings for keyword protection, cabinet control panel lock, security slot, chain opening to help prevent unauthorized access, adjustments and theft deterrence.
• The supplied remote control allows you to assign a CONTROL ID to the projector
Multiple projectors can be operated separately and independently with the same single remote control by assigning an ID number to each projector.
• Integrated RJ-45 connector for wired networking capacity (NP216/NP215 only)
An RJ-45 connector is equipped as standard feature.
• 3D images supported
The projector provides 3D images to a user wearing commercially available DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses.
About this user's manual The fastest way to get started is to take your time and do everything right the first time. Take a few minutes now to review the user's manual. This may save you time later on. At the beginning of each section of the manual you'll find an overview. If the section doesn't apply, you can skip it. In this user's manual the drawings of the projector show an example of NP215.
3
1. Introduction
Part Names of the Projector Front/Top Zoom Lever (→ page 23) Controls (→ page 5)
Focus Ring (→ page 23) Remote Sensor (→ page 8) Ventilation (outlet) Heated air is exhausted from here.
Ventilation (inlet)
Lens
Built-in Security Slot (
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever (→ page 22) Adjustable Tilt Foot (→ page 22)
Lens Cap
)*
Security chain opening Attach an anti-theft device. The security chain opening accepts security wires or chains up to 0.18 inch/4.6 mm in diameter.
* This security slot supports the MicroSaver ® Security System.
Rear
Terminal Panel (→ page 6)
Lamp Cover (→ page 71)
AC Input Connect the supplied power cable's three-pin plug here, and plug the other end into an active wall outlet. (→ page 17) Monaural Speaker (7W)
Ventilation (inlet)
Rear Foot (→ page 22)
4
Spacer (black rubber) To fine-adjust the height of the rear foot, remove the spacer and rotate the rear foot to the desired height.
1. Introduction Top Features
7
8
9
10
5
6
1
2
3
4
6. SOURCE Button (→ page 20)
1. POWER Button (ON / STAND BY) ( ) (→ page 18, 27)
7. MENU Button (→ page 43)
2. POWER Indicator (→ page 17, 18, 27, 73) 3. STATUS Indicator (→ page 73)
8. △▽◁▷ / Keystone △▽ / Volume ◁▷ Buttons (→ page 24, 26, 29)
4. LAMP Indicator (→ page 70, 73)
9. ENTER Button
5. AUTO ADJ. Button (→ page 26)
10. EXIT Button
5
1. Introduction Terminal Panel Features
1
NP216
2
5
3
4
1. COMPUTER 1 IN/ Component Input Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→ page 12, 13, 14) AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (→ page 12, 13, 14)
6
7
8
4. PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin) (→ page 81) Use this port to connect a PC or control system. This enables you to control the projector using serial communication protocol. If you are writing your own program, typical PC control codes are on page 81.
2. COMPUTER 2 IN/ Component Input Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→ page 12, 13, 14) AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (→ page 12, 13, 14)
5. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin) (→ page 15) 6. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA) (→ page 15)
3. MONITOR OUT (COMP 1) Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→ page 13) AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (→ page 13)
7. VIDEO/S-VIDEO AUDIO Input Jacks L/R (RCA) (→ page 12, 13, 14, 15) 8. LAN Port (RJ-45) (→ page 16)
NP215
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
7
NP210/NP115/NP110
1
1. COMPUTER OUT Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→ page 13)
5. AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (→ page 12, 13, 14, 15)
2. COMPUTER IN/ Component Input Connector (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin) (→ page 12, 13, 14)
6. PC CONTROL Port (D-Sub 9 Pin) (→ page 81) Use this port to connect a PC or control system. This enables you to control the projector using serial communication protocol. If you are writing your own program, typical PC control codes are on page 81.
3. VIDEO IN Connector (RCA) (→ page 15) 4. S-VIDEO IN Connector (Mini DIN 4 Pin) (→ page 15)
7. LAN Port (RJ-45) (NP215 only) (→ page 16)
6
1. Introduction
Part Names of the Remote Control 1
3
2
7 5 6 10 12
4 8 9 11 14 15
＋
18 19 20 23 29
10. VIEWER Button (not available on this series of projectors)
13 16 17 22 24 21 25 26
11. ID SET Button (→ page 60) 12. Numeric Keypad Button/CLEAR Button (→ page 60) 13. FREEZE Button (→ page 29) 14. AV-MUTE Button (→ page 29) 15. MENU Button (→ page 43) 16. EXIT Button (→ page 43)
27 28
17. Button (→ page 43) 18. ENTER Button (→ page 43) 19. MAGNIFY (+)(–) Button (→ page 29) 20. MOUSE L-CLICK Button* (→ page 35, 36)
1. Infrared Transmitter (→ page 8)
21. MOUSE R-CLICK Button* (→ page 35, 36)
2. POWER ON Button (→ page 18)
22. PAGE / Button* (→ page 35, 36)
3. POWER OFF Button (→ page 27)
23. ECO MODE Button (→ page 30) 24. KEYSTONE Button (→ page 25)
4, 5, 6. COMPUTER 1/2/3 Button (→ page 20)
25. PICTURE Button (→ page 48, 49)
(COMPUTER 2/3 button is not available on NP215/ NP210/NP115/NP110. COMPUTER 3 button is not available on NP216.)
26. VOL. (+)(–) Button (→ page 26)
7. AUTO ADJ. Button (→ page 26)
27. ASPECT Button (→ page 52)
8. VIDEO Button (→ page 20)
28. FOCUS/ZOOM Button (not available on this series of projectors)
9. S-VIDEO Button (→ page 20)
29. HELP Button (→ page 66)
* The PAGE /, MOUSE L-CLICK and MOUSE R-CLICK buttons work only when the optional remote mouse receiver (NP01MR) is connected with your computer.
7
1. Introduction Battery Installation
1
Press firmly and slide the battery cover off.
2
Install new batteries (AAA). Ensure that you have the batteries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly.
3
Slip the cover back over the batteries until it snaps into place. Do not mix different types of batteries or new and old batteries.
EN
OP
EN
OP
Remote Control Precautions • • • • • • • •
Handle the remote control carefully. If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately. Avoid excessive heat and humidity. Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire. If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries. Ensure that you have the batteries’ polarity (+/−) aligned correctly. Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together. Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control 7 m/22 feet
Remote control
30° 30°
Remote sensor on projector cabinet
Remote control
30° 30°
7 m/22 feet
• The infrared signal operates by line-of-sight up to a distance of about 22 feet/7 m and within a 60-degree angle of the remote sensor on the projector cabinet. • The projector will not respond if there are objects between the remote control and the sensor, or if strong light falls on the sensor. Weak batteries will also prevent the remote control from properly operating the projector.
8
2. Installation and Connections This section describes how to set up your projector and how to connect video and audio sources. Your projector is simple to set up and use. But before you get started, you must first:
1
Set up a screen and the projector. Connect your computer or video equipment to the projector. See pages 12, 13, 14, 15, 16. Connect the supplied power cable. See page 17. NOTE: Ensure that the power cable and any other cables are disconnected before moving the projector. When moving the projector or when it is not in use, cover the lens with the lens cap.
3
2
To the wall outlet.
Setting Up the Screen and the Projector Selecting a Location The further your projector is from the screen or wall, the larger the image. The minimum size the image can be is 30" (0.76 m) measured diagonally when the projector is roughly 49 inches (1.3 m) from the wall or screen. The largest the image can be is 300" (7.6 m) when the projector is about 493 inches (12.5 m) from the wall or screen. Use the chart below as a rough guide. Screen Size (Unit: cm/inch) 609.6(W) x 457.2(H) / 240(W) x 180(H)
Screen Size (diagonal: inch)
30
0"
487.7(W) x 365.8(H) / 192(W) x 144(H)
24
0"
406.4(W) x 304.8(H) / 160(W) x 120(H) 365.8(W) x 274.3(H) / 144(W) x 108(H)
20
0"
18
0"
304.8(W) x 228.6(H) / 120(W) x 90(H)
15
0"
243.8(W) x 182.9(H) / 96(W) x 72(H)
12
0"
203.2(W) x 152.4(H) / 80(W) x 60(H)
10
162.6(W) x 121.9(H) / 64(W) x 48(H)
"
121.9(W) x 91.4(H) / 48(W) x 36(H) 81.3(W) x 61.0(H) / 32(W) x 24(H) 61.0(W) x 45.7(H) / 24(W) x 18(H)
Lens center
80
0"
60
"
40 30 " " 4" .5" 28" " /39 " " " 7" /49" 4" 1.5 0m 295 /3 5.5 246 8.5 10. 1.3m 7m/6 5m/9 m/13 m/16 m/19 6.3/ .5m/ 8.3m 7 1. 2. 5.0 4.2 3.3
nce
ta Dis
"
2.5
/49
5m
12.
h)
/inc
m nit:
(U
NOTE: • The distances are indicated by intermediate values between tele and wide. Use as a rule of thumb. • The Zoom lever adjusts the image size up to +/-5% • For more details on throw distance, see next page.
9
2. Installation and Connections Throw Distance and Screen Size The following shows the proper relative positions of the projector and screen. Refer to the table to determine the position of installation.
Distance Chart C
Screen center B
Screen bottom D 2.7"/68 mm
Lens center
Installation surface
Screen Size B Diagonal Width Height inch mm inch mm inch mm inch 30 762 24 610 18 457 12 40 1016 32 813 24 610 16 60 1524 48 1219 36 914 23 70 1778 56 1422 42 1067 27 80 2032 64 1626 48 1219 31 90 2286 72 1829 54 1372 35 100 2540 80 2032 60 1524 39 120 3048 96 2438 72 1829 47 150 3810 120 3048 90 2286 58 180 4572 144 3658 108 2743 70 200 5080 160 4064 120 3048 78 240 6096 192 4877 144 3658 94 270 6858 216 5486 162 4115 105 300 7620 240 6096 180 4572 117
mm 297 396 594 693 792 891 990 1188 1486 1783 1981 2377 2674 2971
Wide inch mm 46 1180 62 1573 93 2360 108 2753 124 3147 139 3540 155 3933 186 4720 232 5900 279 7080 310 7867 372 9440 418 10620 465 11800
C a D(WIDE) Tele Wide Tele - inch mm inch mm degree - degree 52 1320 3 69 14.0 12.7 69 1760 4 91 14.0 12.7 104 2640 5 137 14.0 12.7 121 3080 6 160 14.0 12.7 139 3520 7 183 14.0 12.7 156 3960 8 206 14.0 12.7 173 4400 9 228 14.0 12.7 208 5280 11 274 14.0 12.7 260 6600 13 343 14.0 12.7 312 7920 16 411 14.0 12.7 346 8800 18 457 14.0 12.7 416 10560 22 548 14.0 12.7 468 11880 24 617 14.0 12.7 520 13200 27 685 14.0 12.7
B = Vertical distance between lens center and screen center C = Throw distance D = Vertical distance between lens center and bottom of screen(top of screen for ceiling application) α = Throw angle NOTE: The values in the tables are design values and may vary.
10
2. Installation and Connections Reflecting the Image
WARNING
Using a mirror to reflect your projector's image enables you to enjoy a much larger image when a smaller space is required. Contact your NEC dealer if you need a mirror system. If you're using a mirror system and your image is inverted, use the MENU and buttons on your projector cabinet or your remote control to correct the orientation. (→ page 59)
* Installing your projector on the ceiling must be done by a qualified technician. Contact your NEC dealer for more information. * Do not attempt to install the projector yourself. • Only use your projector on a solid, level surface. If the projector falls to the ground, you can be injured and the projector severely damaged. • Do not use the projector where temperatures vary greatly. The projector must be used at temperatures between 41˚F (5˚C) and 104˚F (40˚C). ([ECO MODE] is set automatically to [ON] at 95°F to 104°F/35°C to 40°C. Note that [ECO] mode will be set to [ON] automatically at 86°F to 104°F/30°C to 40°C when used in [HIGH ALTITUDE].) • Do not expose the projector to moisture, dust, or smoke. This will harm the screen image. • Ensure that you have adequate ventilation around your projector so heat can dissipate. Do not cover the vents on the side or the front of the projector.
11
2. Installation and Connections
Making Connections Connecting Your PC or Macintosh Computer NOTE: When using with a notebook PC, be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on the power to the notebook PC. In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up. * If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer's screen-saver or power management software.
Enabling the computer’s external display Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the ‘Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through external display selections. NP216 COMPUTER IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
COMPUTER 1 IN AUDIO IN
VGA signal cable (supplied)
VGA signal cable (supplied) To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the projector. It is recommended that you use a commercially available distribution amplifier if connecting a signal cable longer than the cable supplied.
IBM VGA or Compatibles (Notebook type) or Macintosh (Notebook type)
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
Stereo mini-plug audio cable (not supplied)
Stereo mini-plug audio cable (not supplied)
PHONE
NOTE: For older Macintosh, use a commercially available pin adapter (not supplied) to connect to your Mac's video port.
PHONE
NOTE: • Before connecting an audio cable to the headphone jack of a computer, adjust the computer’s volume level to low. After connecting the projector to the computer, adjust the volume of both projector and computer to suitable level as desired to avoid damage to your ear. • If an audio output jack of your computer is a mini jack type, connect the audio cable to it. • An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back via a commercially available scan converter. This is because the projector will process a video signal as a computer signal at the default setting. In that case, do the following. - When an image is displayed with the lower and upper black portion of the screen or a dark image is not displayed correctly: Project an image to fill the screen and then press the AUTO ADJ. button on the remote control or the projector cabinet. - NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: The COMPUTER IN connector supports Plug & Play (DDC2B). NP216: Both the COMPUTER 1 IN and COMPUTER 2 IN connectors support Plug & Play (DDC2B).
12
2. Installation and Connections Connecting an External Monitor
NP216
VGA signal cable (supplied)
COMPUTER OUT
MONITOR OUT (COMP 1)
AUDIO OUT
VGA signal cable (not supplied)
VGA signal cable (supplied)
PHONE
VGA signal cable (not supplied)
You can connect a separate, external monitor to your projector to simultaneously view on a monitor the computer analog image you’re projecting. NOTE: Daisy chain connection is not possible.
13
2. Installation and Connections Connecting Your DVD Player with Component Output Use audio equipment for stereo sound. The projector's built-in speaker is monaural. NP216 AUDIO IN COMPUTER IN
Optional 15-pin - to - RCA (female) ×3 cable (ADP-CV1E)
AUDIO IN
COMPUTER 1 IN
COMPUTER 2 IN
AUDIO IN
Optional 15-pin - to - RCA (female) ×3 cable (ADP-CV1E)
Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio cable (not supplied)
Audio Equipment
Component video RCA×3 cable (not supplied)
AUDIO IN L
R
DVD player Y
Cb
Cr
Component
L
R
AUDIO OUT
Audio cable (not supplied)
NOTE: Refer to your DVD player's owner's manual for more information about your DVD player's video output requirements.
14
2. Installation and Connections Connecting Your VCR Use audio equipment for stereo sound. The projector's built-in speaker is monaural. NP216 S-VIDEO IN VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
S-Video cable (not supplied)
S-Video cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Video cable (not supplied)
Audio cable (not supplied)
Audio equipment VCR
L
R
AUDIO OUT
VIDEO S-VIDEO
AUDIO IN
VIDEO OUT
L
R
Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio cable (not supplied)
Audio cable (not supplied)
NOTE: Refer to your VCR owner's manual for more information about your equipment's video output requirements. NOTE: An image may not be displayed correctly when a Video or S-Video source is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind via a scan converter. NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 TIP: The AUDIO IN Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) is shared between COMPUTER, VIDEO and S-VIDEO inputs.
15
2. Installation and Connections Connecting to a Network (NP216/NP215 only) The projector comes standard with a LAN port (RJ-45) which provides a LAN connection using a LAN cable. Using a LAN cable allows you to specify the Network Settings and the Alert Mail Settings for the projector over a LAN. To use a LAN connection, you are required to assign an IP address to the projector on the [PROJECTOR NETWORK SETTINGS] screen of the web browser on your computer. For setting, see page 37, 38, 39.
Example of LAN connection Example of wired LAN connection Server
NP216
Hub
LAN
LAN cable (not supplied)
LAN
16
NOTE: Use a Category 5 or higher LAN cable.
2. Installation and Connections Connecting the Supplied Power Cable Connect the supplied power cable to the projector. First connect the supplied power cable's three-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other plug of the supplied power cable in the wall outlet.
The projector will go into standby mode. When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will light orange and the STATUS indicator will light green when [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE].
To wall outlet
Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into both the power plug and the wall outlet.
CAUTION: Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation. Use caution when picking up the projector.
17
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) This section describes how to turn on the projector and to project a picture onto the screen.
Turning on the Projector 1. Remove the lens cap • Do not remove the lens cap by pulling on the string. Doing so can cause mechanical damage to the part around the lens.
2. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control for 1 second. The POWER indicator will turn to green and the projector will become ready to use. NOTE: When the projector is turned on, it may take some time before the lamp light becomes bright. TIP: • When the STATUS indicator lights orange, it means that the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is turned on. (→ page 59) • When the message “Projector is locked! Enter your password.” is displayed, it means that the [SECURITY] is turned on. (→ page 32) After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer or video source is turned on and that your lens cap is removed.
＋
Standby
Preparing to power on
Power On
Steady orange light
Blinking green light
Steady green light
(→ page 73) NOTE: When no signal is available, the NEC logo (default), blue, or black screen will be displayed. After a lapse of 45 seconds from when the projector displays a blue, black or logo screen, [ECO MODE] will always switch to [ON]. This is done only when [ECO MODE] is set to [OFF].
18
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen) When you first turn on the projector, you will get the Startup menu. This menu gives you the opportunity to select one of the 21 menu languages. To select a menu language, follow these steps: 1. Use the , , or button to select one of the 21 languages from the menu.
＋
＋
2. Press the ENTER button to execute the selection. After this has been done, you can proceed to the menu operation. If you want, you can select the menu language later. (→ [LANGUAGE] on page 45 and 56) NOTE: • If one of the following things happens, the projector will not turn on. - If the internal temperature of the projector is too high, the projector detects abnormal high temperature. In this condition the projector will not turn on to protect the internal system. If this happens, wait for the projector's internal components to cool down. - When the lamp reaches its end of usable life, the projector will not turn on. If this happens, replace the lamp. - If the STATUS indicator lights orange as long as the POWER button is pressed, it means the CONTROL PANEL LOCK has been set. - If the lamp fails to light, and if the STATUS indicator flashes on and off in a cycle of six times, wait a full minute and then turn on the power. • The projector cannot be turned off with the ON/STAND BY button or the POWER OFF button while the POWER indicator is flashing green in a cycle of 0.5 second on and 0.5 second off. • Do not disconnect the AC power supply to the projector for 60 seconds immediately after turning it on and displaying an image. • Immediately after turning on the projector, screen flicker may occur. This is normal. Wait 3 to 5 minutes until the lamp lighting is stabilized. • If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off or when the temperature is high, the fans run without displaying an image for some time and then the projector will display the image.
19
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Selecting a Source Selecting the computer or video source NOTE: Turn on the computer or video source equipment connected to the projector.
Selecting from Source List Press and quickly release the SOURCE button on the projector cabinet to display the Source list. Each time the SOURCE button is pressed, the input source will change as follows: “COMPUTER”, ”VIDEO”, “S-VIDEO”. To display the selected source, press the ENTER button or allow 2 seconds to elapse.
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Detecting the Signal Automatically Press and hold the SOURCE button for a minimum of 2 seconds, the projector will search for the next available input source. Each time you press and hold the SOURCE button for a minimum of 2 seconds, the input source will change as follows:
NP216
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: COMPUTER → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → COMPUTER → ... NP216: COMPUTER 1 → COMPUTER 2 → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → COMPUTER 1 → ... TIP: If no input signal is present, the input will be skipped.
Using the Remote Control NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: Press any one of the COMPUTER 1, VIDEO, and S-VIDEO buttons. NP216: Press any one of the COMPUTER 1, COMPUTER 2, VIDEO, and SVIDEO buttons.
Selecting Default Source You can set a source as the default source so that it will be displayed each time the projector is turned on. 1. Press the MENU button. The menu will be displayed. 2. Press the button twice to select [SETUP] and press the button or the ENTER button to select [GENERAL]. 3. Press the button four times to select [OPTIONS(2)]. 4. Press the button six times to select [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] and press the ENTER button.
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
The [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] screen will be displayed. (→ page 64) 5. Select a source as the default source, and press the ENTER button. 6. Press the EXIT button a few times to close the menu. 7. Restart the projector. The source you selected in step 5 will be projected. TIP: When the projector is in Standby mode, applying a computer signal from a computer connected to the COMPUTER IN input will power on the projector and simultaneously project the computer’s image. ([AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)]/[AUTO POWER ON(COMP1)] for NP216 → page 64)
20
NP216
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Adjusting the Picture Size and Position Use the adjustable tilt foot, the zoom lever or the focus ring to adjust the picture size and position. In this chapter drawings and cables are omitted for clarity. Adjusting the throw angle (the height of an image) [Tilt foot] (→ page 22)
Adjusting the left and right tilt of an image [Rear foot] (→ page 22)
Finely adjusting the size of an image [Zoom lever] (→ page 23)
Adjusting the focus [Focus ring] (→ page 23)
Adjusting the keystone correction [KEYSTONE] (→ page 24)
21
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) Adjust the Tilt Foot 1. Lift the front edge of the projector. CAUTION: Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet during Tilt Foot adjustment as it can become heated while the projector is turned on and after it is turned off. 2. Push up and hold the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever on the front of the projector to extend the adjustable tilt foot. 3. Lower the front of the projector to the desired height. 4. Release the Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever to lock the Adjustable tilt foot.
1
Ventilation outlet
2
Adjustable Tilt Foot
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever
The tilt foot can be extended up to 1.6 inch/40 mm. There is approximately 10 degrees (up) of adjustment for the front of the projector. Rotate the rear foot to the desired height in order to square the image on the projection surface.
3
CAUTION: • Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector.
4
Adjusting the left and right tilt of an image [Rear foot] 1. Remove the spacer (black rubber) from the rear foot. Keep the spacer for future use. 2. Rotate the rear foot. The rear foot can be extended up to 0.4 inch/10 mm. Rotating the rear foot allows the projector to be placed horizontally. Rear foot
NOTE: After using the projector, attach the spacer to the rear foot.
Spacer (black rubber)
Down
Up
22
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) Zoom Use the ZOOM lever to adjust the image size on the screen.
Zoom Lever
Focus Use the FOCUS ring to obtain the best focus. Focus Ring
23
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Correcting Keystone Distortion Correcting Keystone Distortion If the screen is tilted vertically, keystone distortion becomes large. Proceed with the following steps to correct keystone distortion
NOTE: • The Keystone correction can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically. • The Keystone correction range can be made narrower, depending on a signal or its aspect ratio selection.
Adjusting with buttons on the cabinet 1. Press the (
) or (
) button with no menus displayed.
The keystone bar will be displayed.
2. Use the or to correct the keystone distortion. Adjust so that the right and left sides are parallel. 3. Press the ENTER button. The keystone bar will be closed. NOTE: When the menu is displayed, the above operation is not available. When the menu is displayed, press the MENU button to close the menu and start the Keystone correction. From the menu, select [SETUP] → [GENERAL] → [KEYSTONE]. The changes can be saved with [KEYSTONE SAVE]. (→ page 55)
24
＋
0
ID SET
CLEAR
AV-MUTE FREEZE MENU
EXIT
G MA
NI
Adjusting with the remote control
PA
FY
L-CLICK
1. Press the KEYSTONE button.
GE
ENTER 3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
MOUSE
R-CLICK
ECO MODEKEYSTONEPICTURE
The Keystone bar will be displayed.
HELP FOCUS ASPECT VOL. ZOOM
2. Use the or button to correct the keystone distortion. Adjust so that the right and left sides are parallel.
ON
POWER OFF
AUTO ADJ.
COMPUTER
1
2
VIDEO
3
S-VIDEO VIEWER
4
5
7
8
6 9
0
CLEAR
＋
ID SET
AV-MUTE FREEZE MENU
EXIT
G MA
NI
GE
ENTER
PA
FY
L-CLICK
MOUSE
R-CLICK
ECO MODEKEYSTONEPICTURE
3. Press the ENTER button.
ON POWER OFF AUTO ADJ. HELP FOCUS ASPECT VOL. COMPUTER ZOOM
1
2
VIDEO
3
S-VIDEO VIEWER
4
5
7
8
6 9
0
CLEAR
＋
ID SET
AV-MUTE FREEZE MENU
EXIT
G MA
NI
GE
ENTER
PA
FY
L-CLICK
MOUSE
R-CLICK
ECO MODEKEYSTONEPICTURE HELP FOCUS ASPECT VOL.
NOTE: ZOOM • The Keystone correction can cause an image to be slightly blurred because the correction is made electronically. • The maximum range of vertical keystone correction is +/−40 degrees. This maximum range may be smaller depending on the signal or aspect ratio setting. The Keystone correction range will also be smaller when 3D mode is enabled. • The range of keystone correction is not the maximum tilt angle of projector. • The left and right (horizontal) keystone correction is not available. TIP: The changes can be saved with [KEYSTONE SAVE]. (→ page 55)
25
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
Optimizing Computer Signal Automatically Adjusting the Image Using Auto Adjust Optimizing a computer image automatically. Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer image automatically. This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time. [Poor picture]
＋
[Normal picture]
NOTE: Some signals may take time to display or may not be displayed correctly. • The Auto Adjust function will work for computer (RGB) signal only. • If the Auto Adjust operation cannot optimize the computer signal, try to adjust [HORIZONTAL], [VERTICAL], [CLOCK], and [PHASE] manually. (→ page 51, 52)
Turning Up or Down Volume Sound level from the speaker can be adjusted. Increase volume Decrease volume
TIP: When no menus appear, the and buttons on the projector cabinet work as a volume control. NOTE: The [BEEP] sound volume cannot be adjusted. To turn off the [BEEP] sound, from the menu, select [SETUP] → [OPTIONS (1)] → [BEEP] → [OFF].
26
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
7 Turning off the Projector To turn off the projector: 1. First, press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control. The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE? /CARBON SAVINGS- SESSION X.XXX[g-CO2]] message will appear.
2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the (POWER) or the POWER OFF button again. The lamp will turn off and the projector will go into standby mode. When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will light orange and the STATUS indicator will light green when [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE]. Immediately after turning on the projector and displaying an image, you cannot turn off the projector for 60 seconds.
＋
Power On
Standby
Steady green light
Steady orange light
3. Finally, unplug the power cable. The POWER indicator will go out.
CAUTION: Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the AC power supply is disconnected either during normal projector operation or during cooling fan operation. Use caution when picking up the projector. NOTE: • Do not turn off the power for 60 seconds immediately after turning it on and displaying an image. • Do not disconnect the AC power supply to the projector within 10 seconds of making adjustment or setting changes and closing the menu. Doing so can cause loss of adjustments and settings.
27
3. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)
After Use Preparation: Make sure that the projector is turned off. 1. Disconnect any other cables. 2. Retract adjustable tilt foot if extended. 3. Cover the lens with the lens cap.
28
4. Convenient Features 1 Turning off the Image and Sound Press the AV-MUTE button to turn off the image and sound for a short period of time. Press again to restore the image and sound. NOTE: Even though the image is turned off, the menu still remains on the screen.
＋
2 Freezing a Picture Press the FREEZE button to freeze a picture. Press again to resume motion. NOTE: The image is frozen but the original video is still playing back. ＋
Enlarging a Picture You can enlarge the picture up to four times. NOTE: The maximum magnification may be less than four times depending on the signal or when [WIDE ZOOM] is selected for [ASPECT RATIO]. To do so: 1. Press the MAGNIFY (+) button to magnify the picture. To move the magnified image, use the ,, or button.
2. Press the button. The area of the magnified image will be moved 3. Press the MAGNIFY (−) button. Each time the MAGNIFY (−) button is pressed, the image is reduced. NOTE: • The image will be enlarged or reduced at the center of the screen. • Displaying the menu will cancel the current magnification.
29
4. Convenient Features
Changing Eco Mode This feature enables you to select two brightness modes of the lamp: OFF and ON modes. The lamp life can be extended by turning on the [ECO MODE]. [ECO MODE]
Description
Status of LAMP indicator
[OFF]
This is the default setting (100% Brightness).
Off
LAMP STATUS
[ON]
Select this mode to increase the lamp life (approx. 90% Brightness.)
Steady Green ONlight POWER OFF
AUTO ADJ.
COMPUTER
1
2
VIDEO
To turn on the [ECO MODE], do the following: 1. Press the ECO MODE button on the remote control to display [ECO MODE] screen.
3
S-VIDEO VIEWER
4
5
7
6
8
9
0
CLEAR
＋
ID SET
AV-MUTE FREEZE MENU
EXIT
2. Use the or button to select [ON].
ENTER G MA
NI FY
GE
3. Press the ENTER button. To change from [ON] to [OFF], Go back to Step 2 and select [OFF]. Repeat Step 3.
PA
L-CLICK
MOUSE
R-CLICK
ECO MODEKEYSTONEPICTURE
NOTE: • The [ECO MODE] can be changed by using the menu. Select [SETUP] → [GENERAL] → [ECO MODE]. • The lamp life remaining and lamp hours used can be checked in [USAGE TIME]. Select [INFO.] →[USAGE TIME]. • The projector will always enter into the [ECO MODE] [OFF] condition for 60 seconds immediately after the projector is turned on. The lamp condition will not be affected even when [ECO MODE] is changed within this time period. • After a lapse of 45 seconds from when the projector displays a blue, black or logo screen, [ECO MODE] will automatically switch to [ON]. This is done only when [ECO MODE] is set to [OFF]. • If the projector is overheated in [OFF] mode, there may be a case where the [ECO MODE] automatically changes to [ON] mode to protect the projector. When the projector is in [ON] mode, the picture brightness decreases. When the projector comes back to normal temperature, the [ECO MODE] returns to [OFF] mode. Thermometer symbol [ ] indicates the [ECO MODE] is automatically set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too high.
30
HELP FOCUS ASPECT VOL. ZOOM
LAMP STATUS
4. Convenient Features
5 Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER] This feature will show energy-saving effect in terms of CO2 emission reduction (kg) when the projector’s [ECO MODE] is set to [ON]. This feature is called [CARBON METER]. There are two messages: [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS] and [CARBON SAVINGS-SESSION]. The [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS] message shows the total amount of CO2 emission reduction from the time of shipment up to now. You can check the information on [USAGE TIME] from [INFO.] of the menu. (→ page 66)
The [CARBON SAVINGS-SESSION] message shows the amount of CO2 emission reduction between the time of changing to ECO MODE immediately after the time of power-on and the time of power-off. The [CARBON SAVINGSSESSION] message will be displayed in the [POWER OFF/ ARE YOU SURE?] message at the time of power-off.
TIP: • The formula as shown below is used to calculate the amount of CO2 emission reduction. Amount of CO2 emission reduction = Power consumption in OFF for ECO MODE – Power consumption in ON for ECO MODE x CO2 conversion factor.* * Calculation for amount of CO2 emission reduction is based on an OECD publication “CO2 Emissions from Fuel Combustion, 2008 Edition”. • This formula will not apply to the power consumption which is not affected by whether [ECO MODE] is turned on or off.
31
4. Convenient Features
6 Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY] A keyword can be set for your projector using the Menu to avoid operation by an unauthorized user. When a keyword is set, turning on the projector will display the Keyword input screen. Unless the correct keyword is entered, the projector cannot project an image. • The [SECURITY] setting cannot be cancelled by using the [RESET] of the menu. To enable the Security function: 1. Press the MENU button. The menu will be displayed. 2. Press the button twice to select [SETUP] and press the button or the ENTER button to select [GENERAL]. 3. Press the button to select [INSTALLATION]. 4. Press the button three times to select [SECURITY] and press the ENTER button.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed. 5. Press the button to select [ON] and press the ENTER button.
The [SECURITY KEYWORD] screen will be displayed. 6. Type in a combination of the four buttons and press the ENTER button. NOTE: A keyword must be 4 to 10 digits in length.
The [CONFIRM KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.
32
4. Convenient Features 7. Type in the same combination of buttons and press the ENTER button.
The confirmation screen will be displayed. 8. Select [YES] and press the ENTER button.
The SECURITY function has been enabled. To turn on the projector when [SECURITY] is enabled: 1. Press and hold the POWER button for about 1 second. The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is locked. 2. Press the MENU button.
3. Type in the correct keyword and press the ENTER button. The projector will display an image.
NOTE: The security disable mode is maintained until the power cable is unplugged.
33
4. Convenient Features To disable the SECURITY function: 1. Press the MENU button. The menu will be displayed. 2. Select [SETUP] → [INSTALLATION] → [SECURITY] and press the ENTER button.
The OFF/ON menu will be displayed. 3. Select [OFF] and press the ENTER button.
The KEYWORD CONFIRMATION screen will be displayed.
4. Type in your keyword and press the ENTER button. When the correct keyword is entered, the SECURITY function will be disabled. NOTE: If you forget your keyword, contact your dealer. Your dealer will provide you with your keyword in exchange for your request code. Your request code is displayed in the Keyword Confirmation screen. In this example [K992-45L8-JNGJ-4XU9-1YAT-EEA2] is a request code.
34
4. Convenient Features
7 Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR) The optional remote mouse receiver enables you to operate your computer’s mouse functions from the remote control. It is a great convenience for clicking through your computer-generated presentations.
Connecting the remote mouse receiver to your computer If you wish to use the remote mouse function, connect the mouse receiver and computer. The mouse receiver can be connected directly to the computer’s USB port (type A). NOTE: Depending on the type of connection or OS installed on your computer, you may have to restart your computer or change your computer settings. Computer
Remote mouse receiver
To USB port of PC or Macintosh
When operating a computer via the remote mouse receiver 7m/22 feet
30˚ 30˚
Remote sensor on the remote mouse receiver
When connecting using the USB terminal For PC, the mouse receiver can only be used with a Windows XP*, Windows 2000, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Mac OS X 10.0.0 or later operating system. * NOTE: In SP1 or older version of Windows XP, if the mouse cursor will not move correctly, do the following: Clear the Enhance pointer precision check box underneath the mouse speed slider in the Mouse Properties dialog box [Pointer Options tab]. NOTE: The PAGE and buttons do not work with PowerPoint for Macintosh. NOTE: Wait at least 5 seconds after disconnecting the mouse receiver before reconnecting it and vice versa. The computer may not identify the mouse receiver if it is repeatedly connected and disconnected in rapid intervals.
35
4. Convenient Features Operating your computer’s mouse from the remote control You can operate your computer’s mouse from the remote control. PAGE / Button:
scrolls the viewing area of the window or to move to the previous or next slide in PowerPoint on your computer.
Buttons:
moves the mouse cursor on your computer.
MOUSE L-CLICK Button: works as the mouse left button. MOUSE R-CLICK Button: works as the mouse right button. NOTE: • When you operate the computer using the or button with the menu displayed, both the menu and the mouse pointer will be affected. Close the menu and perform the mouse operation. • The PAGE and buttons do not work with PowerPoint for Macintosh.
About Drag Mode: By pressing the MOUSE L-CLICK or R-CLICK button for 2 or 3 seconds then releasing, the drag mode is set and the drag operation can be performed simply by pressing the button. To drop the item, press the MOUSE L-CLICK (or R-CLICK) button. To cancel it, press the MOUSE R-CLICK (or L-CLICK) button. TIP: You can change the Pointer speed on the Mouse Properties dialog box on the Windows. For more information, see the user documentation or online help supplied with your computer.
36
4. Convenient Features
8 Network Setting by Using an HTTP Browser (NP216/NP215 only) Overview Connecting the projector to a network allows the Alert Mail setting (→ page 39) and the projector control from a computer via the network. To perform the projector control from a web browser, you must have an exclusive application installed on your computer. The IP address and subnet mask of the projector can be set on the Network Setting screen of the web browser by using an HTTP server function. Please be sure to use “Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0” or a higher version for the web browser. (This device uses “JavaScript” and “Cookies” and the browser should be set to accept these functions. The setting method will vary depending on the version of browser. Please refer to the help files and the other information provided in your software.) Access is gained to the HTTP server function by starting the Web browser on the computer via the network connected to the projector and enter the following URL. • Network Setting
http:///index.html
• Alert Mail Setting
http:///lanconfig.html
TIP: • The default IP address is “192.168.0.10”. • The exclusive application can be downloaded from our website. NOTE: • If the PROJECTOR NETWORK SETTINGS screen does not appear in the web browser, press the Ctrl+F5 keys to refresh your web browser (or clear the cache). • The display’s or button’s response can be slowed down or operation may not be accepted depending the settings of your network. Should this happen, consult your network administrator. The projector may not respond if its buttons are repeatedly pressed in rapid intervals. Should this happen, wait a moment and repeat. If you still can’t get any response, turn off and back on the projector.
Preparation Before Use Connect the projector to a commercially available LAN cable before engaging in browser operations. (→ page 16) Operation with a browser that uses a proxy server may not be possible depending on the type of proxy server and the setting method. Although the type of proxy server will be a factor, it is possible that items that have actually been set will not be displayed depending on the effectiveness of the cache, and the contents set from the browser may not be reflected in operation. It is recommended that a proxy server not be used unless it is unavoidable.
Handling of the Address for Operation via a Browser Regarding the actual address that is entered for the address or entered to the URL column when operation of the projector is via a browser, the host name can be used as it is when the host name corresponding to the IP address of the projector has been registered to the domain name server by a network administrator, or the host name corresponding to the IP address of the projector has been set in the “HOSTS” file of the computer being used. Example 1: Example 2:
When the host name of the projector has been set to “pj.nec.co.jp”, access is gained to the network setting by specifying http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html for the address or the entry column of the URL. When the IP address of the projector is “192.168.73.1”, access is gained to the mail alert settings by specifying http://192.168.73.1/index.html for the address or the entry column of the URL.
37
4. Convenient Features Network Settings http:// /index.html
DHCP ����������������������������������Enabling this option automatically assigns an IP address to the projector from your DHCP server. Disabling this option allows you to register the IP address or subnet mask number obtained from your network administrator. TIP: You can check the IP address in the menu when [ENABLE] is selected for [DHCP]. To do so, from the menu, select [INFO.] → [WIRED LAN] when [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set to [LAN]. IP ADDRESS �����������������������Set your IP address of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected for [DHCP]. TIP: You can check your specified IP address in the menu To do so, from the menu, select [INFO.] → [WIRED LAN] . SUBNET MASK �������������������Set your subnet mask number of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected for [DHCP]. DEFAULT GATEWAY ����������������Set your default gateway of the network connected to the projector when [DISABLE] is selected for [DHCP]. DNS (PRIMARY) �����������������Set your primary DNS settings of the network connected to the projector. DNS (SECONDARY) �����������������Set your secondary DNS settings of the network connected to the projector. UPDATE ������������������������������Reflect your settings. NOTE: Close the browser after clicking [UPDATE]. The projector will automatically update your settings. TIP: Selecting [NETWORK SETTINGS] for [RESET] from the projector’s menu allows you to return the following items to the factory default. [DHCP]: DISABLE [IP ADDRESS]: 192.168.0.10 [SUBNET MASK]: 255.255.255.0 [DEFAULT GATEWAY]: 192.168.0.1 * [DNS(PRIMARY)] and [DNS(SECONDARY)] will remain unchanged.
38
4. Convenient Features Alert Mail Setting http:///lanconfig.html
This option notifies your computer of an error message via e-mail when using wired LAN. An error message notification will be sent when the projector lamp has reached the end of its usable life or an error occurs in the projector. HOST NAME ���������������������������� Type in the hostname of the network connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. If the host name is unknown, type in a string of characters representing the projector. Example: Projector 1 DOMAIN NAME ������������������������ Type in the domain name of the network connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. If the domain name is unknown, type in the right side of @ in the sender’s address. Example: nec. com ALERT MAIL ����������������������������� Checking [ENABLE] will turn on the Alert Mail feature. Checking [DISABLE] will turn off the Alert Mail feature. SENDER’S ADDRESS ���������������� Type in the senders address. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be used. SMTP SERVER NAME ��������������� Type in the SMTP server name to be connected to the projector. Up to 60 alphanumeric characters can be used. RECIPIENT’S ADDRESS 1 to 3 ���� Type in your recipient’s address. Up to 60 alphanumeric and symbols characters can be used. APPLY ��������������������������������������� Click this button to reflect the above settings EXECUTE ���������������������������������� Click this button to send a test mail to check if your settings are correct. STATUS ������������������������������������� A reply to a test mail will be displayed. NOTE: • If you execute a test, you may not receive an Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the network settings are correct. • If you entered an incorrect address in a test, you may not receive an Alert mail. Should this happen, check if the Recipient ’s Address is correct TIP: The Alert Mail settings will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
39
4. Convenient Features
Viewing 3D Images The projector provides 3D images to a user wearing commercially available DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses.
CAUTION Health precautions Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the user’s manual included with your LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video files and the like. To avoid any adverse symptoms, heed the following: - Do not use LCD shutter eyeglasses for viewing any material other than 3D images. - Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close a distance can strain your eyes. - Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every hour of viewing. - If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing 3D images. - While viewing 3D images, if you get sick such as nausea, dizziness, queasiness, headache, eyestrain, blurry vision, convulsions, and numbness, stop viewing them. If symptoms still persist, consult a doctor. Features for 3D image viewing The 3D feature supports the DLP® Link system, one of 3D systems called the LCD shutter glass method. 3D viewing is achieved by using dedicated LCD shutter eyeglasses to view left and right eye images alternately projected on the screen. The LCD shutter eyeglasses compatible with the DLP® Link system are used for viewing 3D images by synchronizing to the switched timing of the reflective synch signals, which are included in left eye and right eye images, reflected from the screen. LCD shutter eyeglasses (recommended) Use DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses. We recommend you to use X102 Series manufactured by XpanD. http://www.xpand3dtv.com/ Steps for viewing 3D images on the projector 1. Connect the projector to your video equipment. 2. Turn on the projector, display the on-screen menu, and then select [ON] for the 3D mode.
For the operating procedure to turn on the 3D mode, refer to "On-screen menu for 3D images" on the following page. Set other 3D-related menu options such as [DLP® Link] and [L/R INVERT] as necessary.
3. Play your 3D compatible content and use the projector to display the image. 4. Put on your LCD shutter eyeglasses to view 3D images.
Also refer to the user's manual accompanied with your LCD shutter eyeglasses for more information.
40
4. Convenient Features On-screen menu for 3D images Follow the steps to display the 3D menu. 1. Press the MENU button.
The [SOURCE] menu will be displayed. [NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110]
[NP216]
2. Press the button twice.
The [SETUP] menu will be displayed.
3. Press the button once, and then press the button four times.
The [3D] menu will be displayed [NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110]
[NP216]
Selecting input connected to a source of 3D images [COMPUTER / VIDEO / S-VIDEO]/[COMPUTER 1/COMPUTER 2/VIDEO/S-VIDEO (NP216 only) This function switches the 3D mode between ON and OFF for each input. NOTE: To confirm that the supported 3D signal is accepted, use either way of the following: - Make sure that [3D] is displayed in the top right of the screen after the source is selected. - Display [INFO.] → [SOURCE] → [3D SIGNAL] and make sure that "SUPPORTED" is displayed. Enabling DLP® Link to view 3D images [DLP® Link] To use DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses, select [ON]. To use other LCD shutter eyeglasses such as IR or wired LCD shutter types, select [OFF]. If you use LCD shutter eyeglasses that are not compatible with DLP® Link, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may not synchronize to the projector properly.
41
4. Convenient Features Inverting the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye [L/R INVERT] This function changes the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye. Change the setting if you have difficulty seeing 3D images. • Each time you press the PICTURE button on the remote control, the following menu items will change:
[L/R INVERT] → [CONTRAST] → [BRIGHTNESS] → ...
NOTE: When [OFF] is selected for [DLP® Link], this function is not available. NOTE: • If 3D content is played back on your computer and the performance is poor it may be caused by the CPU or graphics chip. In this case you may have difficulty seeing the 3D images as they were intended. Check to see if your computer meets the requirements provided in your user's manual included with your 3D content. • The DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses allow you to view 3D images by receiving synch signals, which are included in left eye and right eye images, reflected from the screen. Depending on environments or conditions such as the ambient brightness, screen size or viewing distance, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may fail to receive synch signals, causing poor 3D images. • When the 3D mode is enabled, [3D] will be displayed in the [SOURCE] menu. • When the 3D mode is enabled, the Keystone correction range will be narrower. • When the 3D mode is enabled, the following settings are invalid. [WALL COLOR], [PRESET], [REFERENCE], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] • Refer to the [SOURCE] screen under the [INFO.] menu for information on whether the input signal is 3D compatible. • Signals other than those listed below will be out of range or will be displayed in 2D. [COMPUTER]/[COMPUTER 1/COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only)] 640x480@120Hz, 800x600@120Hz, 1024x768@120Hz, 1280x720@120Hz, 640x480@60Hz, 800x600@60Hz, 1024x768@60Hz, 1280x720@60Hz [VIDEO/S-VIDEO] Signals with vertical frequency of 60Hz Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images If images will not be displayed in 3D or 3D images appear as 2D, check the following table. Also refer to the user's manual accompanied with your 3D content or LCD shutter eyeglasses. Possible causes • The content you are playing back is not compatible with 3D. • • •
•
Solutions • Play back a content compatible with 3D. • Use the projector's menu to turn on 3D mode for the selected The 3D mode was turned off for the selected source. source. (→ page 41) You are not using our recommended LCD shutter eyeglasses. • Use our recommended LCD shutter eyeglasses. (→ page 40) If the shutter of your DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses cannot synchronize with the currently projected source, the following are possible causes: - Your LCD shutter eyeglasses are not switched on. • Switch on your LCD shutter eyeglasses. - The battery in the LCD shutter eyeglasses ran down. • Recharge the battery or replace it. • Use the projector's menu to turn on [DLP® Link]. (→ page - [DLP® Link] was not turned on. 41) • Move closer to the screen until the viewer gets 3D images. - The viewing distance between the viewer and the screen is • Or use the projector's menu to select [NON-INVERT] for [L/R too far. INVERT]. • Keep light sources or other projectors away from the viewer. - There are bright light sources or other projectors near the • Do not look toward a bright light source. viewer. • Or use the projector's menu to select [NON-INVERT] for [L/R INVERT]. If your computer is not set for 3D viewing, the following are possible causes: - Your computer does not meet the requirements for 3D view- • Check to see if your computer meets the requirements provided ing. in your user's manual included with your 3D content. - Your computer is not set for 3D output. • Set your computer for 3D output. - The resolution of output signal is out of range. • Select the resolution of output signal supporting 3D. - The refresh rate of output signal is out of range. • Change the refresh rate to 60Hz or 120Hz.
42
5. Using On-Screen Menu Using the Menus NOTE: The on-screen menu may not be displayed correctly while interlaced motion video image is projected. 1. Press the MENU button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the menu.
NOTE: The commands such as ENTER, EXIT, , in the bottom show available buttons for your operation. 2. Press the buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu. 3. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to highlight the top item or the first tab. 4. Use the buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the item you want to adjust or set. You can use the buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet to select the tab you want. 5. Press the ENTER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to display the submenu window. 6. Adjust the level or turn the selected item on or off by using the buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet. Changes are stored until adjusted again. 7. Repeat steps 2 -6 to adjust an additional item, or press the EXIT button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to quit the menu display. NOTE: When a menu or message is displayed, several lines of information may be lost, depending on the signal or settings. 8. Press the MENU button to close the menu. To return to the previous menu, press the EXIT button.
43
5. Using On-Screen Menu
2 Menu Elements Tab
Slide bar
Solid triangle
Available buttons Source
Highlight Radio button
High Altitude symbol Thermometer symbol Key Lock symbol
Off Timer remaining time
Menu windows or dialog boxes typically have the following elements: Highlight �����������������������������Indicates the selected menu or item. Solid triangle ����������������������Indicates further choices are available. A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active. Tab ��������������������������������������Indicates a group of features in a dialog box. Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front. Radio button �����������������������Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box. Source ��������������������������������Indicates the currently selected source. Off Timer remaining time ����Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset. Slide bar �����������������������������Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment. Key Lock symbol ����������������Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled. Thermometer symbol ���������Indicates the [ECO MODE] is forcibly set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too high. High Altitude symbol ����������Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode.
44
5. Using On-Screen Menu
3 List of Menu Items Some menu items are not available depending on the input source. Menu Item SOURCE
Default COMPUTER COMPUTER1, COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only) VIDEO S-VIDEO PRESET
* * *
REFERENCE DETAIL SETTINGS PICTURE
ADJUST
IMAGE OPTIONS
GENERAL
*
GAMMA CORRECTION COLOR TEMPERATURE BrilliantColor DYNAMIC CONTRAST
CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE RESET CLOCK PHASE HORIZONTAL VERTICAL ASPECT RATIO POSITION NOISE REDUCTION TELECINE KEYSTONE KEYSTONE SAVE
MENU
OPTIONS(1)
*
5000, 6500, 7800, 8500, 9300, 10500 OFF, MEDIUM, HIGH
* * * * * 0 LOW 2-2/2-3 AUTO 0 OFF OFF
ECO MODE CLOSED CAPTION (for North America only)
OFF OFF
ENGLISH
ORIENTATION INSTALLATION
DYNAMIC, NATURAL, BLACK DETAIL
*
LANGUAGE
SETUP
CONTROL PANEL LOCK SECURITY COMMUNICATION SPEED CONTROL ID CONTROL ID NUMBER CONTROL ID FAN MODE COLOR SYSTEM
1–6 HIGH-BRIGHT, PRESENTATION, VIDEO, MOVIE, GRAPHIC, sRGB
*
WALL COLOR
COLOR SELECT SOURCE DISPLAY ID DISPLAY ECO MESSAGE DISPLAY TIME BACKGROUND
Options
*
COLOR ON ON OFF AUTO 45 SEC LOGO DESKTOP FRONT OFF OFF 38400bps 1 OFF AUTO
VIDEO
AUTO
S-VIDEO
AUTO
WXGA MODE BEEP
OFF ON
45
OFF, ON
AUTO, 4:3, 16:9, 15:9, 16:10, WIDE ZOOM, NATIVE -16 to +16 OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH OFF, 2-2/2-3 AUTO, 2-2 ON, 2-3 ON -40° to +40° OFF, ON OFF, WHITEBOARD, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD (GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK OFF, ON OFF, CAPTION1, CAPTION2, CAPTION3, CAPTION4, TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4 ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO, ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA, 日本語 DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI, NEDERLANDS, SUOMI , Ελληνικά, 中文, 한 NORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ, 국어 COLOR, MONOCHROME OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SEC BLUE, BLACK, LOGO DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR, CEILING FRONT OFF, ON OFF, ON 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps 1–254 OFF, ON AUTO, HIGH, HIGH ALTITUDE AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM OFF, ON OFF, ON
5. Using On-Screen Menu
OPTIONS(2)
OFF TIMER STANDBY MODE AUTO POWER ON(AC) AUTO POWER ON(COMP.) AUTO POWER ON(COMP1) (NP216 only) AUTO POWER OFF
OFF NORMAL OFF
DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT
LAST
OFF
OFF, ON
OFF
OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:20, 0:30 NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110: LAST, AUTO, COMPUTER, VIDEO, S-VIDEO NP216: LAST, AUTO, COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2, VIDEO, S-VIDEO
SETUP
INFO.
RESET
*
CONTROL TERMINAL (NP216/ NP215 only) COMPUTER COMPUTER1(NP216 only) COMPUTER2(NP216 only) 3D VIDEO S-VIDEO DLP® Link L/R INVERT LAMP LIFE REMAINING USAGE TIME LAMP HOURS USED TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS SOURCE NAME HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY VERTICAL FREQUENCY SIGNAL TYPE SOURCE VIDEO TYPE SYNC TYPE SYNC POLARITY SCAN TYPE 3D SIGNAL PROJECTOR NAME WIRED LAN IP ADDRESS (NP216/NP215 SUBNET MASK GATEWAY only) MAC ADDRESS PRODUCT SERIAL NUMBER FIRMWARE VERSION DATA CONTROL ID (when [CONTROL ID] is set) CURRENT SIGNAL ALL DATA NETWORK SETTINGS (NP216/NP215 only) CLEAR LAMP HOURS
OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00 NORMAL, POWER-SAVING OFF, ON
PC CONTROL PC CONTROL, LAN OFF OFF OFF ON NON-INVERT
The asterisk (*) indicates that the default setting varies depending on the signal.
46
OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON OFF, ON NON-INVERT, INVERT
5. Using On-Screen Menu
4 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE] [NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110]
[NP216]
COMPUTER Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER IN input connector. NOTE: • When the component input signal is connected to the COMPUTER IN connector, select [COMPUTER]. • The projector will determine if the input signal is RGB or component signal.
COMPUTER1 & COMPUTER2 (NP216 only) Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER 1 IN or COMPUTER 2 IN input connector. NOTE: • When the component input signal is connected to the COMPUTER 1 IN connector, select [COMPUTER1]. • The projector will determine if the input signal is RGB or component signal.
VIDEO Selects what is connected to your VIDEO input-VCR, DVD player or document camera.
S-VIDEO Selects what is connected to your S-VIDEO input-VCR or DVD player. NOTE: A frame may freeze for a brief period of time when a video is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind with a Video or SVideo source.
47
5. Using On-Screen Menu
5 Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST] [PICTURE]
[PRESET] This function allows you to select optimized settings for your projected image. You can adjust neutral tint for yellow, cyan or magenta. There are six factory presets optimized for various types of images. You can also use [DETAIL SETTINGS] to set user adjustable settings to customize each gamma or color. Your settings can be stored in [PRESET 1] to [PRESET 6]. HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room. PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file. VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing. MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies. GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics. sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values
[DETAIL SETTINGS]
Storing Your Customized Settings [REFERENCE] This function allows you to store your customized settings in [PRESET 1] to [PRESET 6]. First, select a base preset mode from [REFERENCE], then set [GAMMA CORRECTION], [COLOR TEMPERATURE], [Brilliant Color] and [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]. HIGH-BRIGHT �������� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room. PRESENTATION ����� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file. VIDEO �������������������� Recommended for typical TV program viewing. MOVIE ������������������� Recommended for movies. GRAPHIC ��������������� Recommended for graphics. sRGB ��������������������� Standard color values.
48
5. Using On-Screen Menu Selecting Gamma Correction Mode [GAMMA CORRECTION] Each mode is recommended for: DYNAMIC �������������� Creates a high-contrast picture. NATURAL ��������������� Natural reproduction of the picture. BLACK DETAIL ������� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture.
Adjusting Color Temperature [COLOR TEMPERATURE] This option allows you to select the color temperature of your choice. NOTE: • When [PRESENTATION] or [HIGH-BRIGHT] is selected in [REFERENCE], this function is not available. • When a color option other than [OFF] is selected for [WALL COLOR], this function is not available.
Adjusting Brightness of White Areas [BrilliantColor] This function allows you to adjust the brightness of the white areas. As the picture becomes dim, it looks more natural. OFF ������������������������ Turns off the BrilliantColor feature. MEDIUM ���������������� Increases brightness of the white areas. HIGH ���������������������� Increases more brightness of the white areas. NOTE: • [BrilliantColor] is not available when [HIGH-BRIGHT] is selected for [REFERENCE]. • [BrillianColor] can be set to [MEDIUM] or [HIGH] when [PRESENTATION] is selected for [REFERENCE]
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] Turning on [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] allows the contrast ratio to be adjusted to the proper level.
[CONTRAST] Adjusts the intensity of the image according to the incoming signal.
[BRIGHTNESS] Adjusts the brightness level or the back raster intensity.
[SHARPNESS] Controls the detail of the image.
[COLOR] Increases or decreases the color saturation level.
[HUE] Varies the color level from +/− green to +/− blue. The red level is used as reference. Input signal Computer/Computer 1 & 2 (NP216) Component Video, S-Video
CONTRAST Yes Yes Yes
BRIGHTNESS Yes Yes Yes
Yes = Adjustable, No = Not adjustable
49
SHARPNESS No Yes Yes
COLOR No Yes Yes
HUE No Yes Yes
5. Using On-Screen Menu [RESET] The settings and adjustments for [PICTURE] will be returned to the factory settings with the exception of the following; Preset numbers and [REFERENCE] within the [PRESET] screen. The settings and adjustments under [DETAIL SETTINGS] within the [PRESET] screen that are not currently selected will not be reset.
50
5. Using On-Screen Menu [IMAGE OPTIONS]
Adjusting Clock and Phase [CLOCK/PHASE] This allows you to manually adjust CLOCK and PHASE.
CLOCK ������������������� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear. This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image. This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time.
PHASE ������������������� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk. (This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering.) Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete.
51
5. Using On-Screen Menu Adjusting Horizontal/Vertical Position [HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL] Adjusts the image location horizontally and vertically.
- An image can be distorted during the adjustment of [CLOCK] and [PHASE]. This is not a malfunction. - Your manual adjustments for [CLOCK], [PHASE], [HORIZONTAL], and [VERTICAL] will be stored in memory for the current signal. The next time you project the signal with the same resolution, horizontal and vertical frequency, its adjustments will be called up and applied. To delete adjustments stored in memory, from the menu, you select [RESET] → [CURRENT SIGNAL] or [ALL DATA] and reset the adjustments.
Selecting Aspect Ratio [ASPECT RATIO] The term “aspect ratio” refers to the ratio of width to height of a projected image. The projector automatically determines the incoming signal and displays it in its appropriate aspect ratio. • This table shows typical resolutions and aspect ratios that most computers support. VGA SVGA XGA WXGA WXGA WXGA+ SXGA SXGA+ UXGA Options AUTO
4:3 16:9 15:9 16:10 WIDE ZOOM
Resolution 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 768 1280 x 800 1440 x 900 1280 x 1024 1400 x 1050 1600 x 1200
Aspect Ratio 4:3 4:3 4:3 15:9 16:10 16:10 5:4 4:3 4:3
Function The projector will automatically determine the incoming signal and display it in its aspect ratio. (→ next page) The projector may erroneously determine the aspect ratio depending on its signal. If this occurs, select the appropriate aspect ratio from the following. The image is displayed in 4:3 aspect ratio. The image is displayed in 16:9 aspect ratio. The image is displayed in 15:9 aspect ratio. The image is displayed in 16:10 aspect ratio. The image is stretched left and right. Parts of the displayed image are cropped at the left and right edges and therefore not visible.
52
5. Using On-Screen Menu NATIVE
The projector displays the current image in its true resolution when the incoming computer signal has a lower resolution than the projector’s native resolution. [Example 1] When the incoming signal with the resolution of 800 x 600 is displayed on the NP115/NP110: [Example 2] When the incoming signal with the resolution of 800 x 600 is displayed on the NP216/NP215/ NP210: NOTE: • When a non-computer signal is displayed, the [NATIVE] is not available. • When you are displaying an RGB image with a higher resolution than the projector's native resolution such as SXGA, the image will be displayed in the projector’s native resolution (XGA) even if [NATIVE] is selected.
Sample image when the appropriate aspect ratio is automatically determined [Computer signal] Aspect ratio of incoming signal
4:3
5:4
4:3
Letterbox
16:9
15:9
16:10
Sample image when the appropriate aspect ratio is automatically determined
[Video signal] Aspect ratio of incoming signal Sample image when the aspect ratio is automatically determined
Squeeze
NOTE: To display a squeezed signal properly, select [16:9] or [WIDE ZOOM].
TIP: • Image position can be adjusted vertically using [POSITION] when the [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] aspect ratios are selected. • The term “letterbox” refers to a more landscape-oriented image when compared to a 4:3 image, which is the standard aspect ratio for a video source. The letterbox signal has aspect ratios with the vista size “1.85:1” or cinema scope size “2.35:1” for movie film. • The term “squeeze” refers to the compressed image of which aspect ratio is converted from 16:9 to 4:3.
Adjusting the Vertical Position of Image [POSITION] (only when [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] is selected for [ASPECT RATIO]) When [16:9], [15:9], or [16:10] is selected in [ASPECT RATIO], the image is displayed with black borders on the top and bottom. You can adjust the vertical position from the top to the bottom of the black area.
53
5. Using On-Screen Menu Turning on Noise Reduction [NOISE REDUCTION] This function allows you to select the level of noise reduction. The projector is set to the optimized level for each signal at the factory. Select your preference item for your signal when video noise is noticeable. The options are [OFF], [LOW], [MEDIUM], and [HIGH]. NOTE: This feature is not available for the RGB signal. Noise reduction set to off gives best image quality by way of higher bandwidth. Noise reduction set to on softens the image.
Setting Telecine Mode [TELECINE] This function allows you to convert motion picture film images into video. The process adds additional frames to the picture in order to increase the frame rate. NOTE: This feature is available only when an SDTV signal is selected. OFF ������������������������ Turns off the TELECINE mode. 2-2/2-3 AUTO �������� Detects pull-down correction method. 2-2 ON ������������������� Uses 2-2 pull-down correction method 2-3 ON ������������������� Uses 2-3 pull-down correction method NOTE: This feature is not available for 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i and RGB signals.
54
5. Using On-Screen Menu
6 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP] [GENERAL]
Correcting Vertical Keystone Distortion Manually [KEYSTONE] You can correct vertical distortion manually. (→ page 24) TIP: When this option is highlighted, pressing the ENTER button will display its slide bar for adjustment.
Saving Vertical Keystone Correction [KEYSTONE SAVE] This option enables you to save your current keystone settings. OFF ������������������������ Does not save current keystone correction settings. It will return your keystone correction settings to “zero”. ON ������������������������� Saves current keystone correction settings Saving your change once affects all sources. The changes are saved when the projector is turned off.
Using the Wall Color Correction [WALL COLOR]
This function allows for quick adaptive color correction in applications where the screen material is not white. NOTE: • Selecting color options other than [OFF] will reduce brightness. • When the 3D mode is enabled, the [WALL COLOR] item is not available.
55
5. Using On-Screen Menu Setting Eco Mode [ECO MODE] This feature turns on or off the ECO mode. The lamp life can be extended by selecting [ON]. Selecting [ON] also decreases fan noise when compared to [OFF] mode. ECO MODE
Description
Status of LAMP indicator
OFF
This is the Default setting (100% Brightness).
Off
ON
Select this mode to increase the lamp life Steady Green light (approx. 90% Brightness.)
NOTE: • The [LAMP LIFE REMAINING] and [LAMP HOURS USED] can be checked in [USAGE TIME]. Select [INFO.] → [USAGE TIME]. (→ page 66) • The projector will always enter into the [ECO MODE] [OFF] condition for 60 seconds immediately after the projector is turned on. The lamp condition will not be affected even when [ECO MODE] is changed within this time period. • After a lapse of 45 seconds from when the projector displays a blue, black or logo screen, [ECO MODE] will automatically switch to [ON]. The projector will return to the [OFF] mode once a signal is accepted. • If the projector becomes overheated in [OFF] mode because of use in a high-temperature room, there may be a case where the [ECO MODE] automatically changes to [ON] mode to protect the projector. This mode is called “forced ECO mode”. When the projector is in [ON] mode, the picture brightness decreases. The LAMP indicator’s steady light indicates the projector is in [ON] mode. When the projector comes back to normal temperature, the [ECO MODE] returns to [OFF] mode. Thermometer symbol [ ] indicates the [ECO MODE] is automatically set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too high.
Setting Closed Caption [CLOSED CAPTION] (for North America only) This option sets several closed caption modes that allow text to be superimposed on the projected image of Video or S-Video. OFF ������������������������ This exits the closed caption mode. CAPTION 1-4 ��������� Text is superimposed. TEXT 1-4 ���������������� Text is displayed.
Selecting Menu Language [LANGUAGE] You can choose one of 21 languages for on-screen instructions. NOTE: Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
56
5. Using On-Screen Menu [MENU]
Selecting Menu Color [COLOR SELECT] You can choose between two options for menu color: COLOR and MONOCHROME.
Turning On / Off Source Display [SOURCE DISPLAY] This option turns on or off input name display such as COMPUTER, VIDEO, S-VIDEO and No Input to be displayed on the top right of the screen. When [ON] is selected, the following will be displayed: - An input name display such as [COMPUTER] will be shown immediately after source selection. - [NO INPUT] will be shown when there is no signal present.
Turning ON/OFF Control ID [ID DISPLAY] ID DISPLAY ����������� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control is pressed.
Turning On / Off Eco Message [ECO MESSAGE] This option turns on or off the following messages when the projector is turned on. The Eco Message prompts the user to save energy. When [OFF] is selected for [ECO MODE], you will get a message to prompt you to select [ON] for [ECO MODE]. When [ON] is selected for [ECO MODE]
To close the message, press the ENTER or the EXIT button. The message will disappear if no button operation is done for 30 seconds. When [OFF] is selected for [ECO MODE]
Pressing the ENTER button will display the [ECO MODE] screen. (→ page 56) To close the message, press the EXIT button.
57
5. Using On-Screen Menu Selecting Menu Display Time [DISPLAY TIME] This option allows you to select how long the projector waits after the last touch of a button to turn off the menu. The preset choices are [MANUAL], [AUTO 5 SEC], [AUTO 15 SEC], and [AUTO 45 SEC]. The [AUTO 45 SEC] is the factory preset.
Selecting a Color or Logo for Background [BACKGROUND] Use this feature to display a blue/black screen or logo when no signal is available. The default background is [LOGO]. TIP: The logo can be changed. For more information about how to change the logo, please consult your NEC or NEC-designated service station. If you cannot find one in your area, ask your dealer. NOTE: Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
58
5. Using On-Screen Menu [INSTALLATION]
Selecting Projector Orientation [ORIENTATION] This reorients your image for your type of projection. The options are: desktop front projection, ceiling rear projection, desktop rear projection, and ceiling front projection. DESKTOP FRONT
CEILING REAR
DESKTOP REAR
CEILING FRONT
Disabling the Cabinet Buttons [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] This option turns on or off the CONTROL PANEL LOCK function. NOTE: • This CONTROL PANEL LOCK does not affect the remote control functions. • When the control panel is locked, pressing and holding the EXIT button on the projector cabinet for about 10 seconds will change the setting to [OFF]. TIP: When the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is turned on, a key lock icon [
] will be displayed at the bottom right of the menu.
Enabling Security [SECURITY] This feature turns on or off the SECURITY function. Unless the correct keyword is entered, the projector cannot project an image. (→ page 32) NOTE: Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
59
5. Using On-Screen Menu Selecting Communication Speed [COMMUNICATION SPEED] This feature sets the baud rate of the PC Control port (D-Sub 9P). It supports data rates from 4800 to 38400 bps. The default is 38400 bps. Select the appropriate baud rate for your equipment to be connected (depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs). NOTE: Your selected communication speed will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
Setting ID to the Projector [CONTROL ID] You can operate multiple projectors separately and independently with the single remote control that has the CONTROL ID function. If you assign the same ID to all the projectors, you can conveniently operate all the projectors together using the single remote control. To do so, you have to assign an ID number to each projector. CONTROL ID NUMBER �������Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector. CONTROL ID �����������������������Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID setting. NOTE: • When [ON] is selected for [CONTROL ID], the projector cannot be operated by using the remote control that does not support the CONTROL ID function. (In this case the buttons on the projector cabinet can be used.) • Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu. • Pressing and holding the ENTER button on the projector cabinet for 10 seconds will display the menu for canceling the Control ID. Assigning or Changing the Control ID 1. Turn on the projector. ＋
2. Press the ID SET button on the remote control. The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.
If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID, the [ACTIVE] will be displayed. If the projector cannot be operated with the current remote control ID, the [INACTIVE] will be displayed. To operate the inactive projector, assign the control ID used for the projector by using the following procedure (Step 3). 3. Press one of numeric keypad buttons while pressing and holding the ID SET button on the remote control. Example: To assign “3”, press the “3” button on the remote control. No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single remote control. To set “No ID”, enter “000” or press the CLEAR button. TIP: The range of IDs is from 1 to 254. 4. Release the ID SET button. The updated CONTROL ID screen will be displayed. NOTE: • The IDs can be cleared in a few days after the batteries are run down or removed. • Accidentally pressing any one of the buttons of the remote control will clear currently specified ID with batteries removed.
60
＋
5. Using On-Screen Menu [OPTIONS(1)]
Selecting Fan Mode [FAN MODE] This option allows you to select three modes for fan speed: Auto mode, High speed mode, and High Altitude mode. AUTO ��������������������� The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature. HIGH ���������������������� The built-in fans run at high speed. HIGH ALTITUDE ����� The built-in fans run at a high speed. Select this option when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher. When you wish to cool down the temperature inside the projector quickly, select [HIGH]. NOTE: • It is recommended that you select High speed mode if you use the projector non-stop for consecutive days. • Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher. • Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. • Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO]. • Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical components such as the lamp. • Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
Selecting [COLOR SYSTEM] This feature enables you to select video standards manually. Normally select [AUTO]. Select the video standard from the pulldown menu. This must be done for VIDEO and SVIDEO Connectors separately.
Enabling or Disabling WXGA Mode [WXGA MODE] Selecting [ON] will give priority to a WXGA (1280 x 768) signal in recognizing an input signal. When [WXGA MODE] is set to [ON], an XGA (1024 x 768) signal may not be recognized. In this case, select [OFF].
61
5. Using On-Screen Menu Enabling Key Sound and Error Sound [BEEP] This feature turns on or off the button sound or alarm when the following operations are performed. - Displaying the main menu - Switching sources - Pressing POWER ON or POWER OFF button
62
5. Using On-Screen Menu [OPTIONS(2)]
Using Off Timer [OFF TIMER] The remaining countdown time will be displayed at the bottom of the menu when the [OFF TIMER] is preset. 1. Select your desired time between 30 minutes and 16 hours: OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00. 2. Press the ENTER button on the remote control. 3. The remaining time starts counting down. 4. The projector will turn off after the countdown is complete. NOTE: • To cancel the preset time, set [OFF] for the preset time or turn off the power. • When the remaining time reaches 3 minutes before the projector is turned off, the [THE PROJECTOR WILL TURN OFF WITHIN 3 MINUTES] message will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.
Selecting Power-saving in [STANDBY MODE] The projector has two standby modes: [NORMAL] and [POWER-SAVING]. The POWER-SAVING mode is the mode that allows you to put the projector in the power-saving condition which consumes less power than the NORMAL mode. The projector is preset for NORMAL mode at the factory. NORMAL ���������������� Power indicator: Orange light/STATUS indicator: Green light POWER-SAVING ���� Power indicator: Red light/STATUS indicator: Off The following connectors, buttons or functions will not work during this mode. - PC CONTROL port, and COMPUTER OUT connector (MONITOR OUT on NP216) - LAN and Mail Alert functions (NP216/NP215 only) - Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet - Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control NOTE: • When [CONTROL PANEL LOCK], [CONTROL ID], or [AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)] is turned on, the [STANDBY MODE] setting is not available. • The power consumption in the standby mode will not be included in calculating CO2 emission reduction. • Your setting will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu.
Enabling Auto Power On [AUTO POWER ON(AC)] Turns the projector on automatically when the power cable is inserted into an active power outlet. This eliminates the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or projector cabinet.
63
5. Using On-Screen Menu Turning On the Projector By Applying Computer Signal [AUTO POWER ON(COMP.)/[AUTO POWER ON(COMP1) ] for NP216] When the projector is in Standby mode, applying a computer signal from a computer connected to the COMPUTER IN input (COMPUTER 1 IN on NP216) will power on the projector and simultaneously project the computer’s image. This functionality eliminates the need to always use the POWER button on the remote control or the projector cabinet to power on the projector. NOTE: • Disconnecting a computer signal from the computer will not power off the projector. We recommend using this function in combination of the AUTO POWER OFF function. • This function will not be available under the following conditions: - when a component signal is applied to the COMPUTER IN (COMPUTER 1 IN on NP216) connector - when a Sync on Green RGB signal or composite sync signal is applied • To enable the AUTO POWER ON (COMP.)/AUTO POWER ON (COMP1) after turning off the projector, wait 3 seconds and input a computer signal. If a computer signal is still present when the projector is turned off, the AUTO POWER ON (COMP.)/AUTO POWER ON (COMP1) will not work and the projector remains in standby mode.
Enabling Power Management [AUTO POWER OFF] When this option is selected you can enable the projector to automatically turn off (at the selected time: 5min., 10min., 20min., 30min.) if there is no signal received by any input or if no operation is performed.
Selecting Default Source [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] You can set the projector to default to any one of its inputs each time the projector is turned on. LAST �����������������������������������Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on. AUTO ����������������������������������Searches for an active source in order of COMPUTER → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → COMPUTER (COMPUTER 1 → COMPUTER 2 on NP216) and displays the first found source. COMPUTER ������������������������Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER IN connector every time the projector is turned on. COMPUTER 1 (NP216 only) ����������������������Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned on. COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only) ����������������������Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned on. VIDEO ���������������������������������Displays the Video source from the VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on. S-VIDEO �����������������������������Displays the Video source from the S-VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on.
Selecting Port for External Equipment [CONTROL TERMINAL] (NP216/NP215 only) This option allows you to select a port for controlling the projector either from PC Control or over a LAN. PC CONTROL ��������� Select for controlling the projector from external equipment connected to the PC CONTROL port (D-Sub 9 Pin). LAN ������������������������ Select for controlling the projector from external equipment connected to the LAN port (RJ-45). NOTE: - When [POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY MODE], controlling the projector from external equipment is not possible. - The PC Control port and LAN port are not active at the same time.
64
5. Using On-Screen Menu [3D] [NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110]
[NP216]
Selecting input connected to a source of 3D images [COMPUTER / VIDEO / S-VIDEO]/[COMPUTER 1/COMPUTER 2/VIDEO/S-VIDEO] (NP216 only) This function switches the 3D mode between ON and OFF for each input. ON ������������������������� Turns on the 3D mode for the selected input. NOTE: To confirm that the supported 3D signal is accepted, use either way of the following: - Make sure that [3D] is displayed in the top right of the screen after the source is selected. - Display [INFO.] → [SOURCE] → [3D SIGNAL] and make sure that "SUPPORTED" is displayed. OFF ������������������������ Turns off the 3D mode for the selected input. Enabling DLP® Link to view 3D images [DLP® Link] This function switches the DLP® Link system between ON and OFF. ON ������������������������� Turns on the DLP® Link system. OFF ������������������������ Turns off the DLP® Link system. NOTE: To use DLP® Link compatible LCD shutter eyeglasses, select [ON]. To use other LCD shutter eyeglasses such as IR or wired LCD shutter types, select [OFF]. If you use LCD shutter eyeglasses that are not compatible with DLP® Link, the LCD shutter eyeglasses may not synchronize to the projector properly.
Inverting the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye [L/R INVERT] This function changes the order of displaying the images for left eye and right eye. Change the setting if you have difficulty seeing 3D images. Each time you press the PICTURE button on the remote control, the following menu items will change: [L/R INVERT] → [CONTRAST] → [BRIGHTNESS] ...
65
5. Using On-Screen Menu
7 Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.] Displays the status of the current signal and lamp usage. This item has three pages (four pages on NP216/NP215). The information included is as follows: TIP: Pressing the HELP button on the remote control will show the [INFO.] menu items.
[USAGE TIME]
[LAMP LIFE REMAINING] (%)* [LAMP HOURS USED] (H) [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS] (kg-CO2) * The progress indicator shows the percentage of remaining bulb life.
The value informs you of the amount of lamp usage. When the remaining lamp time reaches 0, the LAMP LIFE REMAINING bar indicator changes from 0% to 100 Hours and starts counting down.
If the remaining lamp time reaches 0 hours, the projector will not turn on regardless of whether the ECO MODE is set to OFF or ON.
• The message to the effect that the lamp should be replaced will be displayed for one minute when the projector is turned on and when the POWER button on the projector or the remote control is pressed.
To dismiss this message, press any button on the projector or the remote control. Lamp life(H) ECO MODE OFF ON
3500
5000
Replacement lamp NP13LP
• [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS]
This displays the estimated carbon saving information in kg. The carbon footprint factor in the carbon saving calculation is based on the OECD (2008 Edition).
66
5. Using On-Screen Menu [SOURCE]
[SOURCE NAME] [VERTICAL FREQUENCY] [VIDEO TYPE] [SYNC POLARITY] [3D SIGNAL]
[HORIZONTAL FREQUENCY] [SIGNAL TYPE] [SYNC TYPE] [SCAN TYPE]
[WIRED LAN] (NP216/NP215 only)
[PROJECTOR NAME] [SUBNET MASK] [MAC ADDRESS]
[IP ADDRESS] [GATEWAY]
[VERSION]
[PRODUCT] [SERIAL NUMBER] [FIRMWARE] Version [DATA] Version [CONTROL ID] (when [CONTROL ID] is set)
67
5. Using On-Screen Menu
8 Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET] [NP210/NP115/NP110]
[NP216/NP215]
Returning to Factory Default [RESET] The RESET feature allows you to change adjustments and settings to the factory preset for a (all) source (s) except the following: [CURRENT SIGNAL] Resets the adjustments for the current signal to the factory preset levels. The items that can be reset are: [PRESET], [CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], [COLOR], [HUE], [SHARPNESS], [ASPECT RATIO], [HORIZONTAL], [VERTICAL], [CLOCK], [PHASE], [NOISE REDUCTION], and [TELECINE]. [ALL DATA] Reset all the adjustments and settings for all the signals to the factory preset. All items can be reset EXCEPT [LANGUAGE], [BACKGROUND], [SECURITY], [COMMUNICATION SPEED], [CONTROL ID], [STANDBY MODE], [FAN MODE], [CONTROL TERMINAL] (NP216/NP215 only), [LAMP LIFE REMAINING], [LAMP HOURS USED], [TOTAL CARBON SAVINGS], and [NETWORK SETTINGS] (NP216/NP215 only). To reset the lamp usage time, see “Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS]” below.
Clearing Networking Settings [NETWORK SETTINGS] (NP216/NP215 only) Returns [DHCP], [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and [GATEWAY] to the default settings.
Clearing Lamp Hour Meter [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] Resets the lamp clock back to zero. Selecting this option displays submenu for a confirmation. Select [YES] and press the ENTER button. NOTE: Elapsed time of the lamp use will not be affected even when [RESET] is done from the menu. NOTE: The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life. In this condition you cannot clear the lamp hour meter on the menu. If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero. Do this only after replacing the lamp.
68
6. Maintenance This section describes the simple maintenance procedures you should follow to clean the cabinet and the lens, and replace the lamp.
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens 1. Turn off the projector before cleaning. 2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
Vacuum the ventilation inlet of the cabinet.
Note on Cleaning the Lens Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
69
6. Maintenance
Replacing the Lamp When the lamp reaches the end of its life, the LAMP indicator in the cabinet will blink red. Even though the lamp may still be working, replace the lamp to maintain the optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to clear the lamp hour meter. (→ page 68)
CAUTION • Use the specified lamp for safety and performance. • DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off, and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before handling. • DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except one lamp cover screw and three lamp housing screws. You could receive an electric shock. • Do not break the glass on the lamp housing.
Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints on the glass surface might cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
• The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp reaches the end of its life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement. *NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions: • for one minute after the projector has been powered on • when the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control is pressed To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. To replace the lamp: Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement: • Replacement lamp: NP13LP • Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
70
6. Maintenance 1. Remove the lamp cover. (1) Loosen the lamp cover screw • The lamp cover screw is not removable. (2) Push and slide the lamp cover off.
2. Remove the lamp housing. (1) Loosen the three screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling condition. • The three screws are not removable. • There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock. (2) Remove the lamp housing by holding it. CAUTION: Make sure that the lamp housing is cool enough to before removing it.
Interlock
71
6. Maintenance 3. Install a new lamp housing. (1) Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp NP13LP. Order this from your NEC dealer. (2) Push the top center of the lamp housing to secure it. (3) Secure it in place with the three screws. • Be sure to tighten the screws. Hold the cabinet with your hand to keep it from tilting while you tighten the screw.
4. Reattach the lamp cover. (1) Slide the lamp cover back until it snaps into place. (2) Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover. • Be sure to tighten the screw.
5. Connect the supplied power cable, and turn on the projector. 6. Finally, select the menu → [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] to reset the lamp usage hours. NOTE: When you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life, the projector cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed. If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero. When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
72
7. Appendix Troubleshooting This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages Power Indicator Indicator Condition Off Blinking light
Steady light
Green
Projector Condition
Note
The power cable is unplugged.
–
0.5 sec On, 0.5 sec Off
The projector is getting ready to turn on.
Wait for a moment.
2.5 sec On, 0.5 sec Off
Off Timer is enabled.
–
Green
The projector is turned on.
–
Orange
[NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE]
–
Red
[POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY – MODE]
Status Indicator Indicator Condition Off Blinking light
Steady light
Red
Projector Condition
Note
Normal or Standby ([POWER-SAVING] for – [STANDBY MODE]) 1 cycle (0.5 sec Lamp cover error or lamp housing error On, 2.5 sec Off)
Replace the lamp cover or lamp housing correctly.
2 cycle (0.5 sec Temperature error On, 0.5 sec Off)
The projector is overheated. Move the projector to a cooler location.
4 cycle (0.5 sec Fan error On, 0.5 sec Off)
Fans will not work correctly.
6 cycle (0.5 sec Lamp error On, 0.5 sec Off)
Lamp fails to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on again.
Green
Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cooling The projector is re-firing. down.) Wait for a moment.
Green
Standby ([NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE])
–
Orange
Cabinet button is locked
You have pressed cabinet button when Cabinet Button is locked.
CONTROL ID error
Remote control ID and projector ID are not matched.
Lamp Indicator Indicator Condition Off
Projector Condition Normal
Note –
Blinking light
Red
Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp replace- Replace the lamp. ment message will be displayed.
Steady light
Red
Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The projec- Replace the lamp. tor will not turn on until the lamp is replaced. – [ECO MODE] is set to [ON]
Green
Over-Temperature Protection If the temperature inside the projector rises too high, the over-temperature protector will automatically turn off the lamp with the STATUS indicator blinking (2-cycle On and Off.) Should this happen, do the following: • Unplug the power cable after the cooling fans stop. • Move the projector to a cooler location if the room where you are presenting is particularly too warm. • Clean the ventilation holes if they are clogged with dust. • Wait about 60 minutes until the inside of the projector becomes cool enough.
73
7. Appendix Common Problems & Solutions (→ “Power/Status/Lamp Indicator” on page 73.) Problem
Check These Items
Does not turn on or shut down
• Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote control is on. (→ pages 17 and 18) • Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. (→ page 72) • Check to see if the projector has overheated. If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location. • Check to see if you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If so, replace the lamp. After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used. (→ page 68) • The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again. • Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher. Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. (→ page 61) If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for some time and then the projector will display the image. Wait for a moment.
Will turn off
• Ensure that the [OFF TIMER] or [AUTO POWER OFF] is off. (→ page 63, 64)
No picture
• Use the COMPUTER1, the VIDEO or the S-VIDEO button on the remote control to select your source (Computer, Video or S-Video). (→ page 20) If there is still no picture, press the button again. • Ensure your cables are connected properly. • Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. (→ page 49) • Remove the lens cap. • Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the [RESET] in the Menu. (→ page 68) • Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. (→ page 32) • Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on the power to the notebook PC. In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up. * If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver or power management software. • See also the next page.
Picture suddenly be- • Check if the projector is in the Forced ECO mode because of too high ambient temperature. If this is the case, lower the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]. (→ page 61) comes dark Color tone or hue is • Check if an appropriate color is selected in [WALL COLOR]. If so, select an appropriate option. (→ page 55) unusual • Adjust [HUE] in [PICTURE]. (→ page 49) Image isn’t square to the • Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. (→ page 21) screen • Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. (→ page 24) Picture is blurred
• Adjust the focus. (→ page 23) • Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. (→ page 21) • Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. (→ page 10) • Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on. Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
F l i cke r a p p e a r s o n • Set [FAN MODE] to other than [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode when using the projector at altitudes approximately screen 5500 feet/1700 meters or lower. Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO]. (→ page 61) Image is scrolling ver- • Check the computer's resolution and frequency. Make sure that the resolution you are trying to display is suptically, horizontally or ported by the projector. (→ page 80) both • Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the [IMAGE OPTIONS]. (→ page 52) Remote control does • not work • • •
Install new batteries.(→ page 8) Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector. Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. (→ page 8) Make sure that the remote control's ID corresponds with the projector's ID. (→ page 60)
Indicator is lit or blink- • See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator. (→ page 73) ing Cross color in RGB • Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. (→ page 26) mode • Adjust the computer image manually with [CLOCK]/[PHASE] in [IMAGE OPTIONS] in the menu. (→ page 51) LAN control is not ac- • Make sure that [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set correctly. (→ page 64) tive or PC Control is not active Cannot control the pro- • Check to see if [STANDBY MODE] is set to [POWER-SAVING] and if it is, try to set it to [NORMAL]. (→ page jector from exter nal 63) equipment 3D picture is not dis- • See "Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images" on page 42. play
For more information contact your dealer.
74
7. Appendix If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly. • Power on process for the projector and the PC.
Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on the power to the notebook PC.
In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up. NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu under Information. If it reads “0kHz”, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. (→ page 67 or go to next step)
• Enabling the computer’s external display.
Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through external display selections.
• Non-standard signal output from the computer
If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use. Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previous step. Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.
• Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh
When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect.
For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP switch to the 13" fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a displayable mode and then restart the Macintosh again. NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub 15-pin connector.
• Mirroring on a PowerBook * When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless “mirroring” is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring. • Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen
Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] → [Arrange] from the Apple menu and arrange icons.
75
7. Appendix
Specifications This section provides technical information about the NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector's performance.
Model Number
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110
Optical Projection System 1
Resolution* Lens Lamp
Light Output*2,*3 Contrast Ratio*3 (full white: full black) Image Size (Diagonal) Projection Distance Projection Angle
Single DLP® chip (0.55", aspect 4:3) NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 pixels NP115/NP110: 800 x 600 pixels Manual zoom and focus F=2.41-2.55, f=21.8-24.0mm 180W AC (160W in ECO Mode) NP216/NP215/NP115: 2500 lumens (approx. 90% in ECO Mode) NP210/NP110: 2200 lumens (approx. 90% in ECO Mode) 2000:1 30" - 300" diagonal (4:3) 46" - 465" (wide) / 52" - 520" (tele) 1.18 - 11.8 m (wide) / 1.32 - 13.2 m (tele) 14.0° (wide) / 12.7° (tele)
*1 Effective pixels are more than 99.99%. *2 This is the light output value (lumens) when the [PRESET] mode is set to [HIGH-BRIGHT]. If any other mode is selected as the [PRESET] mode, the light output value may drop. *3 Compliance with ISO21118-2005
Electrical Inputs
Output PC Control Wired LAN Built-in Speaker External Control Color Reproduction Compatible Signals*4 Video Bandwidth Scan Rate Sync Compatibility Horizontal Resolution Power Requirement/Input Current
Power Consumption
NP216: 2 Analog RGB shared with component video (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 S-Video (Mini DIN 4 Pin), 1 Video (RCA), 2 Stereo Mini Audio, 1 (L/R) RCA Audio NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110:1 Analog RGB shared with component video (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin), 1 S-Video (Mini DIN 4 Pin), 1 Video (RCA), 1 Stereo Mini Audio shared for analog RGB, Video, and S-Video inputs 1 Analog RGB (Mini D-Sub 15 Pin), AUDIO OUT Mini Jack (Stereo Mini) (NP216 only) 1 PC Control (D-Sub 9 Pin) 1 Port RJ-45 (NP216/NP215 only) 7W (monaural) RS232, IR, Wired LAN (NP216/NP215 only) 16.7 million colors simultaneously, Full color VGA/SVGA/XGA/WXGA/SXGA/SXGA+/UXGA 480i/480p/720p/1080i (60Hz) 576i/576p/720p/1080i (50Hz) DVD: Progressive (50/60Hz) RGB: 100MHz (max.) Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz(RGB: 24 kHz or over) Vertical: 50 Hz to 120 Hz (Signals with higher than refresh rate 85 Hz support resolutions of 1024 x 768 or lower.) Separate Sync 540 TV lines: NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-M/PAL-N/PAL60 300 TV lines: SECAM Power Requirement: 100-240V AC, 50/60 Hz Input Current: 2.6-1.2A in OFF for ECO MODE: 242W(100-130V AC)/233W(200-240V AC) in ON for ECO MODE: 217W(100-130V AC)/210W(200-240V AC) in NORMAL Mode for STANDBY MODE: 4W(100-130V AC)/5W(200-240V AC) in POWER-SAVING Mode for STANDBY MODE: 0.49W(100-130V AC)/0.71W(200-240V AC)
*4 An image with higher resolution than the projector’s native resolution (NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 / NP115/NP110: 800 x 600) will be displayed with scaling technology.
76
7. Appendix Mechanical Installation Dimensions Net Weight
Environmental Considerations
Orientation: Desktop/Front, Desktop/Rear, Ceiling/Front, Ceiling/Rear 12.2"(W) x 3.7 (H) x 9.7"(D) 310 mm (W) x 95 mm (H) x 247 mm (D) (not including protrusions) 5.5 lbs / 2.5 kg Operational Temperatures: 41°F to 104°F / 5°C to 40°C ([ECO MODE] is set automatically to [ON] at 95°F to 104°F/35°C to 40°C / [ECO MODE] is set automatically to [ON] at 86°F to 104°F/30°C to 40°C when used in HIGH ALTITUDE), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing) Storage Temperatures: 14°F to 122°F (-10°C to 50°C), 20% to 80% humidity (non-condensing)
Regulations For United States: UL Approved (UL 60950-1) Meets FCC Class B requirements For Canada: UL Approved (CSA 60950-1) Meets DOC Canada Class B requirements For Australia/New Zealand: Meets AS/NZS CISPR.22 Class B For Europe: Meets EMC Directive (EN55022, EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3) Meets Low Voltage Directive (EN60950-1, TÜV GS Approved)
For additional information visit: US : http://www.necdisplay.com/ Europe : http://www.nec-display-solutions.com/ Global : http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html For information on our optional accessories, visit our website or see our brochure. The specifications are subject to change without notice.
77
7. Appendix
Cabinet Dimensions NP216
NP215
247(9.7)
NP210/NP115/NP110
310(12.2)
Lens center
95 (3.7)
96(3.8)
68.4 (2.7)
Lens center
Unit: mm (inch)
78
7. Appendix
Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector
6
11 12 13 14 15 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5
Signal Level Video signal : 0.7Vp-p (Analog) Sync signal : TTL level
Pin No. RGB Signal (Analog)
YCbCr Signal
Cr Y Cb
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Red Green or Sync on Green Blue Ground Ground Red Ground Green Ground Blue Ground No Connection Sync Signal Ground No Connection Bi-directional DATA (SDA) Horizontal Sync or Composite Sync Vertical Sync Data Clock
79
Cr Ground Y Ground Cb Ground
7. Appendix
Compatible Input Signal List Horizontal: 15KHz to 100KHz (RGB: 24KHz or over) Vertical: 50Hz to 120Hz (Signals with higher than refresh rate 85 Hz support resolutions of 1024 x 768 or lower.) Signal VIDEO
NTSC/PAL60 PAL/SECAM
IBM compatible
Apple Macintosh®
HDTV SDTV DVD
720p 720p 1080i 1080i 480p 576p YCbCr
Resolution (Dots) — — 640 × 480 640 × 480 640 × 480 640 × 480 640 × 480 800 × 600 800 × 600 800 × 600 800 × 600 800 × 600 1024 × 768 1024 × 768 1024 × 768 1024 × 768 1280 × 768 1280 × 800 1280 × 960 1280 × 1024 1400 × 1050 1600 × 1200 640 × 480 832 × 624 1024 × 768 1280 × 720 1280 × 720 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080 — — — —
Frequency H. (kHz) 15.73 15.63 31.47 31.48 37.86 37.50 43.27 35.16 37.88 48.08 46.88 53.67 48.36 56.48 60.02 68.68 47.78 49.70 60.00 63.98 75.00 35.00 49.72 60.24 37.50 45.00 28.13 33.75 31.47 31.25 15.73 15.63
Refresh Rate (Hz) 60.00 50.00 59.94 59.95 72.81 75.00 85.01 56.25 60.32 72.19 75.00 85.06 60.00 70.07 75.03 85.00 59.87 59.81 60.00 60.02 60.00 60.02 66.67 74.55 74.93 50.00 60.00 50.00 60.00 59.94 50.00 59.94 50.00
NOTE: • An image with higher resolution than the projector’s native resolution (NP216/NP215/NP210: 1024 x 768 / NP115/NP110: 800 x 600) will be displayed with scaling technology. • Signals other than those specified in the table above may not be displayed correctly. If this should happen, change the refresh rate or resolution on your PC. Refer to Display Properties help section of your PC for procedures. • Sync on Green and Composite sync signals are not supported.
80
7. Appendix
PC Control Codes and Cable Connection PC Control Codes Function
Code Data
POWER ON
02H
00H
00H
00H
00H
02H
POWER OFF
02H
01H
00H
00H
00H
03H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
01H
09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 1 (NP216 only)
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
01H
09H
INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 2 (NP216 only)
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
02H
0AH
INPUT SELECT VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
06H
0EH
INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO
02H
03H
00H
00H
02H
01H
0BH
13H
PICTURE MUTE ON
02H
10H
00H
00H
00H
12H
PICTURE MUTE OFF
02H
11H
00H
00H
00H
13H
SOUND MUTE ON
02H
12H
00H
00H
00H
14H
SOUND MUTE OFF
02H
13H
00H
00H
00H
15H
NOTE: Contact your local dealer for a full list of the PC Control Codes if needed.
Cable Connection Communication Protocol Baud rate �����������������������������������������38400 bps Data length ��������������������������������������8 bits Parity �����������������������������������������������No parity Stop bit ��������������������������������������������One bit X on/off ��������������������������������������������None Communications procedure..............Full duplex NOTE: Depending on the equipment, a lower baud rate may be recommended for long cable runs.
PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P) To TxD of PC To RxD of PC To GND of PC
1
2 6
3 7
4 8
5 9 To RTS of PC To CTS of PC
NOTE 1: Pins 1, 4, 6 and 9 are no used. NOTE 2: Jumper “Request to Send” and “Clear to Send” together on both ends of the cable to simplify cable connection. NOTE 3: For long cable runs it is recommended to set communication speed within projector menus to 9600 bps.
81
7. Appendix
Troubleshooting Check List Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by referring to the “Troubleshooting” section in your user’s manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem more efficiently. * Print this page and the next page for your check. Frequency of occurrence always sometimes (How often?_____________________)
other (__________________)
Power No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also “Status Indicator (STATUS)”. Power cable’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet. Lamp cover is installed correctly. Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after lamp replacement. No power even though you press and hold the POWER button for 1 second.
Shut down during operation. Power cable’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet. Lamp cover is installed correctly . [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO POWER OFF] function). [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER] function).
Video and Audio No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the projector. Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC first, then start the PC. Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector. • A combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display on or off. No image (blue or black background, no display). Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJ. button. Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu. Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector A message appears on the screen. ( _____________________________________________ ) The source connected to the projector is active and available. Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast. Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector.
Parts of the image are lost. Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ. button. Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu. Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction. Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal. Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector. Some pixels are lost. Image is flickering. Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ. button. Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu. Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal. Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from [HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO]. Image appears blurry or out of focus. Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution. Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus.
Image is too dark. Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast. Image is distorted. Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment).
No sound. Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the projector. Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level. AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Other Remote control does not work. No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control. Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls. Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function) [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in the menu. Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button for a minimum of 10 seconds.
82
7. Appendix In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used Installation environment
Projector Model number:
Screen size:
Serial No.:
Screen type: White matte Beads Polarization
Date of purchase:
Lamp operating time (hours):
Throw distance:
Eco Mode:
inch
Wide angle High contrast feet/inch/m
Orientation: Ceiling mount Desktop
Off On
Power outlet connection:
Information on input signal: Horizontal synch frequency [
] kHz
Connected directly to wall outlet
Vertical synch frequency
[
] Hz
Synch polarity
H (+) (−)
Connected to power cord extender or other (the number of connected equipment______________)
V (+) (−)
Synch type
Separate Composite
Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number of connected equipment______________)
Sync on Green
Computer
STATUS Indicator: Steady light
Orange Green
Manufacturer:
Flashing light
[
Model number:
] cycles
Remote control model number:
Notebook PC / Desktop Native resolution: Refresh rate: Video adapter:
Projector
Other:
PC
DVD player
Video equipment
Signal cable
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable? Model number:
Length:
inch/m
Manufacturer:
Distribution amplifier
Model number:
Model number: Switcher Model number: Adapter Model number:
83
7. Appendix
TravelCare Guide
7) Problems caused by natural consumption, wear or deterioration of parts under normal usage conditions. 8) Problems or damage to lamps and other expendable supplies, included parts or optional parts. 9) Other conditions stipulated in the warranty included with the product also apply.
TravelCare - a service for international travelers This product is eligible for “TravelCare”, NEC’s unique international warranty. Please note that TravelCare coverage differs in part from coverage under the warranty included with the product.
NOTE: The product can be used overseas with voltages indicated in the rating label on the product by using a power cable suited for the standards and power source voltage of the country in which the product is being used.
Services offered with TravelCare This warranty allows customers to receive service on their product at the NEC and NEC-designated service stations in the countries listed herein when temporarily traveling internationally for business or pleasure. For details on services offered by the different service stations, please refer to the “List of TravelCare Outlets” below.
List of TravelCare Outlets This list applies as of December 1, 2009. For the most up-to-date information, please refer to the websites of the service stations in the various countries on the List of TravelCare Outlets or to the NEC website at http://www.nec-display.com/global/ index.html
1 Repair services The product will be repaired and delivered within 10 business days, not including shipping time. During the term of warranty, the cost of maintenance parts, labor costs for repairs and shipping costs within the service station’s coverage area are covered by the warranty.
In Europe NEC Europe Ltd. / European Technical Centre Address: Unit G, Stafford Park 12, Telford TF3 3BJ, U.K. Telephone: +44 1952 237000 Fax Line: +44 1952 237006 Email Address:
[email protected] WEB Address: http://www.neceur.com
2 Replacement product rental service If the customer desires, he or she can rent a replacement product while the original product is being repaired. Fee: US$200 for 12 days This fee must be paid at the local service station in cash or credit card. The US$200 rental fee is non-refundable even if the customer rents it less than 12 days before returning. The replacement product will be delivered within 3 business days. If the customer did not return the replacement product within 12 days, the customer will be charged the price of the unit. If the customer returned the replacement product in a faulty or damaged condition, the repair cost will be charged to the customer. Note that this service is not offered in all countries and regions. Please refer to the “List of TravelCare Outlets”. In addition, this replacement product rental service is not offered after the product’s warranty has expired.
(Regions Covered) EU: Austria*, Belgium*, Bulgaria*, Czech Republic*, Cyprus*, Denmark*, Estonia*, Finland*, France*, Germany*, Greece*, Hungary*, Ireland*, Italy*, Latvia*, Lithuania*, Luxembourg*, Malta*, The Netherlands*, Poland*, Portugal*, Romania*, Slovakia*, Slovenia*, Spain*, Sweden* and the United Kingdom* EEA: Norway*, Iceland and Liechtenstein In North America NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. Address: 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100 Itasca, Illinois 60143, U.S.A. Telephone: +1 800 836 0655 Fax Line: +1 800 356 2415 Email Address:
[email protected] WEB Address: http://www.necdisplay.com/
Term of warranty 1 a. Upon presentation of the warranty or receipt received upon purchase:
(Regions Covered) U.S.A. *, Canada*
Valid for the term indicated on the warranty or the normal term of warranty for the country of purchase.
In Oceania AWA Limited. Address: 151 Arthur Street Homebush West NSW 2140 Australia Customer Call Centre Telephone: 0297647777 Fax Line: 1300772688 Email Address:
[email protected]
b. When only the product is brought in:
Valid for a period of within 14 months of the date of manufacture indicated by the serial number attached to the product.
2 When a product whose term of warranty is expired is brought in: Repairs will be offered for a fee. In this case the customer is not eligible for the replacement product rental service. 3 In the following cases, repairs may be charged, even if the product’s warranty is still in effect:
For Travel Care service, while customer is in Australia, the customer will contact AWA on 1300366144, select Option 4. If you want to book warranty service by email customer goes to:
[email protected].
1) If the term of warranty, model name, serial number and name of the store of purchase are not indicated on the warranty or have been altered. 2) Problems or damage caused by dropping or shocks during shipment or movement by the customer or by improper handling by the customers. 3) Problems or damage caused by improper usage or unwarrantable alterations or repairs by the customer. 4) Problems or damage caused by fire, salt damage, gas damage, earthquakes, lightning damage, storm or flood damage or other natural disasters or such external factors as dust, cigarette smoke, abnormal voltage, etc. 5) Problems or damage caused by use in hot or humid places, in vehicles, boats or ships, etc. 6) Problems or damage caused by expendable supplies or devices connected to the product other than those designated by NEC.
(Regions Covered) Australia Visual Group Ltd. Address: Telephone: Fax Line: Email Address:
28 Walls Road Penrose Auckland New Zealand 095250740 095809607
[email protected]
(Regions Covered) New Zealand NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental service are offered.
84
7. Appendix In Asia and Middle East NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. Address: 686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun, Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan Telephone: +81 465 85 2369 Fax Line: +81 465 85 2393 Email Address:
[email protected] WEB Address: http://www.nec-display.com/global/index.html
NEC Corporation of Malaysia Sdn. Bhd. Address: 33rd Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P. Ramlee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Telephone: +6 03 2178 3600 (ISDN) Fax Line: +6 03 2178 3789 Email Address:
[email protected] WEB Address: http://www.necmalaysia.com.my/home.html (Regions Covered) Malaysia
(Regions Covered) Japan*
Hyosung ITX Co., Ltd. Address: 1st Fl., Ire B/D. #2, 4Ga, Yangpyeng-Dong, Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul, Korea 150-967 Telephone: +82 2 2163 4193 Fax Line: +82 2 2163 4196 Email Address:
[email protected]
NEC Solutions (China) Co.,Ltd. Address: Rm 1903, Shining Building, 35 Xueyuan Rd, Haidian District Beijing 100083, P.R.C. Telephone: +8610 82317788 Fax Line: +8610 82331722 Email Address:
[email protected] [email protected] WEB Address: http://www.necsl.com.cn
(Regions Covered) South Korea Lenso Communication Co., Ltd. Address: 292 Lenso House 4, 1st Floor, Srinakarin Road, Huamark, Bangkapi, Bangkok 10240, Thailand Telephone: +66 2 375 2425 Fax Line: +66 2 375 2434 Email Address:
[email protected] WEB Address: http://www.lensocom.com/
(Regions Covered) China NEC Hong Kong Ltd. Address: 25/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong Telephone: +852 2369 0335 Fax Line: +852 2795 6618 Email Address:
[email protected] [email protected] WEB Address: http://www.nec.com.hk
(Regions Covered) Thailand e-flex L.L.C. Address:
(Regions Covered) Hong Kong NEC Taiwan Ltd. Address: Telephone: Fax Line: Email Address: WEB Address:
Telephone: Fax Line: Email Address:
7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. +886 2 8500 1700 +886 2 8500 1420
[email protected] http://www.nec.com.tw
(Regions Covered) United Arab Emirates Samir Photographic Supplies Address: P.O.Box 599, Jeddah 21421, Saudi Arabia Telephone: +966 2 6828219 Fax Line: +966 2 6830820 Email Address:
[email protected]
(Regions Covered) Taiwan NEC Asia Pte.Ltd. Address: Telephone: Fax Line: Email Address: WEB Address:
Al Suwaidi Road, Rashidiya 43500 Dubai United Arab Emirates +971 4 2861533 +971 4 2861544
[email protected]
401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par Technocentre, Singapore 149598 +65 6 273 8333 +65 6 274 2226
[email protected] http://www.nec.com.sg/
(Regions Covered) Saudi Arabia NOTE: In countries designated with an asterisk(*), replacement product rental service are offered.
(Regions Covered) Singapore
85
7. Appendix Date:
/
/
P-1/
,
,
TO: NEC or NEC’s Authorized Service Station: FM:
(Company & Name with signature)
Dear Sir (s), I would like to apply your TravelCare Service Program based on attached registration and qualification sheet and agree with your following conditions, and also the Service fee will be charged to my credit card account, if I don’t return the Loan units within the specified period. I also confirm following information is correct. Regards.
Application Sheet for TravelCare Service Program Country, product purchased : User’s Company Name : User’s Company Address : Phone No., Fax No. : User’s Name : User’s Address : Phone No., Fax No. : Local Contact office : Local Contact office Address : Phone No., Fax No. : User’s Model Name : Date of Purchase : Serial No. on cabinet : Problem of units per User : Required Service :
(1) Repair and Return
(2) Loan unit
(1) Credit Card
(2) Travelers Cheque
Requested period of Loan unit : Payment method : In Case of Credit Card : Card No. w/Valid Date :
86
(3) Cash
7. Appendix Condition of your TravelCare Service Program
5. Loan Service Charges and Conditions: Upon acceptance of this NEC Projector, Customer agrees to assume liability for this loan unit.
Enduser is requested to understand following condition of TravelCare Service Program and complete the necessary information on the application sheet.
The current cost of use of this loan unit is US$200 for 12 calendar days. If Customer does not return the unit within the 12 calendar days, Customer will be charged the next highest cost up to and including the full list price to Credit Cards, which price will be informed by NEC Authorized Service Stations. Please see the attached listing of contacts for each country to arrange for pickup of the loan unit. If you return to their country of origin with the loan unit, you will be charged additional freight to return the unit to the loaning country.
1. Service Options: There are 3 types of [Service] available. Enduser has to understand following condition and is required to fill in the Application Sheet. 1) Repair and Return: The ‘Faulty unit’ is sent or collected from the customer. It is repaired and returned within 10 days to the customer, excluding transport time. There may have a case, repair and return can’t be done by NEC Authorized Service Station, because of shortage of spare parts due to same model is not sold in the territory.
Thank you for your understanding of this program.
2) Repair and Return with Loan: (This service is limited to some Service Stations) This service is offered to the Enduser, who cannot wait until their unit is repaired. The customer can borrow a unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer then sends in inoperable unit to nearest NEC Authorized Service Station for service. In order to prevent collection problem, Enduser is required to fill in Application Sheet. Enduser needs to confirm the availability of the Service to NEC Authorized Service Stations. 3) Loan Only: For this service, NEC Authorized Service Station supplies the customer with a loan unit for US$200 up to 12 days. Customer keeps the inoperable unit and when customer returns home, customer arranges to have the projector serviced in the home country. 2. Warranty Exclusions: This program does not apply if the Projector’s serial number has been defaced, modified or removed. If, in the judgement of NEC Authorized Service Station or its agent the defects or failures result from any cause other than fair wear and tear or NEC neglect, or fault including the following without limitation: 1) Accidents, transportation, neglect, misuse, abuse, water, dust, smoke or default of or by the Customer its employees or agents or any third party; 2) Failure or fluctuation of electrical power, electrical circuitry, air conditioning, humidity control or other environmental conditions such as use it in smoking area; 3) Any fault in the attachments or associated products or components (whether or not supplied by NEC or its agents which do not form part of the Product covered by this warranty); 4) Any act of God, fire, flood, war, act of violence or any similar occurrence; 5) Any attempt by any person other than any person authorized by NEC to adjust, modify, repair, install or service the product. 6) Any Cross-border charges such as, duty, insurance, tax etc. 3. Charges for Warranty Exclusions and Out of Warranty Case: In case faulty unit is under warranty exclusions case or under Out of Warranty period, NEC Authorized Service Station will Inform estimation of actual service cost to the Enduser with reason. 4. Dead on Arrival (DOA): Enduser must take this issue up with their original supplier in the country of purchase. NEC Authorized Service Station will repair the DOA unit as a Warranty repair, but will not exchange DOA unit with new units.
87
© NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010
7N951472
Portable Projector
NP216/NP215/NP210/ NP115/NP110 Important Information
English Français Español Troubleshooting Check List
• The NP210 is not distributed in North America. • Le modèle NP210 n’est pas distribué en Amérique du Nord. • El NP210 no se distribuye en Estados Unidos.
Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish market EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.
English
How to Use the Supplied User Documents The following user documents are included with the projector.
Important Information •
First read Important Information. It covers information about projector safety, cautions, lamp replacement and troubleshooting.
Quick Setup Guide •
The Quick Setup Guide provides initial setup and usage information regarding source connection, turning on the power, selecting a source and other basic operating instructions.
User’s Manual on CD-ROM •
The complete user’s manual is supplied on the NEC Projector CD-ROM in PDF (Portable Document Format) and provides detailed product and usage information for your NEC projector. The user’s manual is available in 11 languages (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Russian, Korean, simplified Chinese and Japanese). To view or print the PDF files Adobe Acrobat Reader™ or Adobe Reader™ is required. NOTE: Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader can be downloaded from Adobe’s website. Visit http://www.adobe.com and obtain the current version for your OS.
•
To view the user’s manual (PDF) [Windows] 1. Place the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM in your computer’s CD-ROM drive. 2. Double-click the [My Computer] icon on the Windows desktop. 3. Double-click the [NECPJ] CD-ROM icon. 4. Double-click [start_menu.pdf]. • Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu. 5. Click [User’s Manual]. The Index menu will be displayed. 6. Click the chapter title you want to view. [Macintosh] 1. Place the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM in your Macintosh’s CD-ROM drive. 2. Double-click the [NECPJ] CD-ROM icon on your Macintosh’s Desktop. 3. Double-click [start_menu.pdf]. • Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader will start and allow you to view the Start Menu. 4. Click [User’s Manual]. The Index menu will be displayed. 5. Click the chapter title you want to view.
•
To copy the User’s Manual (PDF) to your computer: The user’s manuals on the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM can be copied to your computer hard drive. From the supplied NEC Projector CD-ROM, select [manual] → [English] → [NP216_index_E.pdf] and [NP216_ manual_E.pdf] and copy them to your computer hard drive.
See the User’s manual (PDF format) on the supplied CD-ROM for detailed information.
E-1
What’s in the Box? Make sure your box contains everything listed. If any pieces are missing, contact your dealer. Please save the original box and packing materials if you ever need to ship your projector.
Projector
Lens cap (24F45801)
Power cable (US: 7N080236) (EU: 7N080022)
Remote control (7N900881)
VGA signal cable (7N520073)
Batteries (AAAx2)
For North America only Registration card Limited warranty
For North America Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731) Important Information (7N8N0752)
NEC Projector CD-ROM User’s manual (7N951472)
For other countries than North America Quick Setup Guide (7N8N0731 and 7N8N0741) Important Information (7N8N0752 and 7N8N0762)
E-2
For customers in Europe: You will find our current valid Guarantee Policy on our Web Site: www.nec-display-solutions.com
Safety Cautions Precautions Please read this manual carefully before using your NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 projector and keep the manual handy for future reference. CAUTION To turn off main power, be sure to remove the plug from power outlet. The power outlet socket should be installed as near to the equipment as possible, and should be easily accessible. CAUTION TO PREVENT SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET. THERE ARE HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. This symbol warns the user that uninsulated voltage within the unit may be sufficient to cause electrical shock. Therefore, it is dangerous to make any kind of contact with any part inside of the unit. This symbol alerts the user that important information concerning the operation and maintenance of this unit has been provided. The information should be read carefully to avoid problems. WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. DO NOT USE THIS UNIT’S PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD OR IN AN OUTLET UNLESS ALL THE PRONGS CAN BE FULLY INSERTED.
DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only) This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV, The highest sound pressure level is less than 70 dB (A) in accordance with EN ISO 7779.
Disposing of your used product EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical and electronic products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from normal household waste. This includes projectors and their electrical accessories or lamps. When you dispose of such products, please follow the guidance of your local authority and/or ask the shop where you purchased the product. After collecting the used products, they are reused and recycled in a proper way. This effort will help us reduce the wastes as well as the negative impact such as mercury contained in a lamp to the human health and the environment at the minimum level. The mark on the electrical and electronic products only applies to the current European Union Member States.
WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS: Handling the cables supplied with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.
E-3
RF Interference (for USA only) WARNING The Federal Communications Commission does not allow any modifications or changes to the unit EXCEPT those specified by NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. in this manual. Failure to comply with this government regulation could void your right to operate this equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help. For UK only: In UK, a BS approved power cable with moulded plug has a Black (five Amps) fuse installed for use with this equipment. If a power cable is not supplied with this equipment please contact your supplier.
Important Safeguards These safety instructions are to ensure the long life of your projector and to prevent fire and shock. Please read them carefully and heed all warnings.
Installation •
Do not place the projector in the following conditions: - on an unstable cart, stand, or table. - near water, baths, or damp rooms. - in direct sunlight, near heaters, or heat radiating appliances. - in a dusty, smoky or steamy environment. - on a sheet of paper or cloth, rugs or carpets.
•
If you wish to have the projector installed on the ceiling: - Do not attempt to install the projector yourself. - The projector must be installed by qualified technicians in order to ensure proper operation and reduce the risk of bodily injury. - In addition, the ceiling must be strong enough to support the projector and the installation must be in accordance with any local building codes. - Please consult your dealer for more information.
WARNING • Do not cover the lens with the lens cap or equivalent while the projector is on. Doing so can lead to melting of the cap due to the heat emitted from the light output. • Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of the projector lens. Doing so could lead to the object melting from the heat that is emitted from the light output.
E-4
Place the projector in a horizontal position The tilt angle of the projector should not exceed 10 degrees, nor should the projector be installed in any way other than the desktop and ceiling mount, otherwise lamp life could decrease dramatically.
10˚
Fire and Shock Precautions •
Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation and that vents are unobstructed to prevent the build-up of heat inside your projector. Allow at least 4 inches (10cm) of space between your projector and a wall.
•
Do not try to touch the ventilation outlet on the front side as it can become heated while the projector is turned on and immediately after the projector is turned off.
•
Prevent foreign objects such as paper clips and bits of paper from falling into your projector. Do not attempt to retrieve any objects that might fall into your projector. Do not insert any metal objects such as a wire or screwdriver into your projector. If something should fall into your projector, disconnect it immediately and have the object removed by a qualified service personnel.
•
Do not place any objects on top of the projector.
•
Do not touch the power plug during a thunderstorm. Doing so can cause electrical shock or fire.
•
The projector is designed to operate on a power supply of 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz. Ensure that your power supply fits this requirement before attempting to use your projector.
•
Do not look into the lens while the projector is on. Serious damage to your eyes could result.
•
Keep any items such as magnifying glass out of the light path of the projector. The light being projected from the lens is extensive, therefore any kind of abnormal objects that can redirect light coming out of the lens, can cause unpredictable outcome such as fire or injury to the eyes.
•
Do not place any objects, which are easily affected by heat, in front of a projector exhaust vent. Doing so could lead to the object melting or getting your hands burned from the heat that is emitted from the exhaust.
•
Handle the power cable carefully. A damaged or frayed power cable can cause electric shock or fire. - Do not use any power cables than the supplied one. - Do not bend or tug the power cable excessively. - Do not place the power cable under the projector, or any heavy object. - Do not cover the power cable with other soft materials such as rugs. - Do not heat the power cable. - Do not handle the power plug with wet hands.
•
Turn off the projector, unplug the power cable and have the projector serviced by a qualified service personnel under the following conditions: - When the power cable or plug is damaged or frayed. - If liquid has been spilled into the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water.
E-5
- If the projector does not operate normally when you follow the instructions described in this user's manual. - If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. - If the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service. •
Disconnect the power cable and any other cables before carrying the projector.
•
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable before cleaning the cabinet or replacing the lamp.
•
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cable if the projector is not to be used for an extended period of time.
•
When using a LAN cable (NP216/NP215 only): For safety, do not connect to the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage. CAUTION • Do not use the tilt-foot for purposes other than originally intended. Misuses such as using the tilt foot to carry or hang (from the wall or ceiling) the projector can cause damage to the projector. • Do not send the projector in the soft case by parcel delivery service or cargo shipment. The projector inside the soft case could be damaged. • Select [HIGH] in Fan mode if you continue to use the projector for consecutive days. (From the menu, select [SETUP] → [OPTIONS(1)] → [FAN MODE] → [HIGH].) • Do not turn off the AC power for 60 seconds after the lamp is turned on and while the POWER indicator is blinking green. Doing so could cause premature lamp failure. • Parts of the projector may become temporarily heated if the projector is turned off with the POWER button or if the AC power supply is disconnected during normal projector operation. Use caution when picking up the projector.
Remote Control Precautions •
Handle the remote control carefully.
•
If the remote control gets wet, wipe it dry immediately.
•
Avoid excessive heat and humidity.
•
Do not heat, take apart, or throw batteries into fire.
•
If you will not be using the remote control for a long time, remove the batteries.
•
Ensure that you have the batteries' polarity (+/–) aligned correctly.
•
Do not use new and old batteries together, or use different types of batteries together.
•
Dispose of used batteries according to your local regulations.
Lamp Replacement •
Use the specified lamp for safety and performance.
•
To replace the lamp, follow all instructions provided on page E-9.
•
Be sure to replace the lamp when the message [THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS USABLE LIFE. PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP.] appears. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp has reached the end of its usable life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your dealer for lamp replacement.
A Lamp Characteristic The projector has a high-pressure mercury lamp as a light source. A lamp has a characteristic that its brightness gradually decreases with age. Also repeatedly turning the lamp on and off will increase the possibility of its lower brightness.
E-6
CAUTION: • DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before handling. • When removing the lamp from a ceiling-mounted projector, make sure that no one is under the projector. Glass fragments could fall if the lamp has been burned out.
Note for US Residents The lamp in this product contains mercury. Please dispose according to Local, State or Federal Laws. Health precautions to users viewing 3D images Before viewing, be sure to read health care precautions that may be found in the user’s manual included with your LCD shutter eyeglasses or your 3D compatible content such as DVDs, video games, computer's video files and the like. To avoid any adverse symptoms, heed the following: - Do not use LCD shutter eyeglasses for viewing any material other than 3D images. - Allow a distance of 2 m/7 feet or greater between the screen and a user. Viewing 3D images from too close a distance can strain your eyes. - Avoid viewing 3D images for a prolonged period of time. Take a break of 15 minutes or longer after every hour of viewing. - If you or any member of your family has a history of light-sensitive seizures, consult a doctor before viewing 3D images. - While viewing 3D images, if you get sick such as nausea, dizziness, queasiness, headache, eyestrain, blurry vision, convulsions, and numbness, stop viewing them. If symptoms still persist, consult a doctor.
About High Altitude mode •
Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher.
•
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the protector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector.
•
Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO].
•
Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher can shorten the life of optical components such as the lamp.
About Copyright of original projected pictures: Please note that using this projector for the purpose of commercial gain or the attraction of public attention in a venue such as a coffee shop or hotel and employing compression or expansion of the screen image with the following functions may raise concern about the infringement of copyrights which are protected by copyright law. [ASPECT RATIO], [KEYSTONE], Magnifying feature and other similar features. This device is not intended for use in the direct field of view at visual display workplaces. To avoid incommoding reflections at visual display workplaces this device must not be placed in the direct field of view.
E-7
Cleaning the Cabinet and the Lens 1. Turn off the projector before cleaning. 2. Clean the cabinet periodically with a damp cloth. If heavily soiled, use a mild detergent. Never use strong detergents or solvents such as alcohol or thinner.
Vacuum the ventilation inlet of the cabinet.
Note on Cleaning the Lens Use a blower or lens paper to clean the lens, and be careful not to scratch or mar the lens.
E-8
Replacing the Lamp When the lamp reaches the end of its life, the LAMP indicator in the cabinet will blink red. Even though the lamp may still be working, replace the lamp to maintain the optimal projector performance. After replacing the lamp, be sure to clear the lamp hour meter. (→ page 68 (User's Manual))
CAUTION •
Use the specified lamp for safety and performance.
•
DO NOT TOUCH THE LAMP immediately after it has been used. It will be extremely hot. Turn the projector off, and then disconnect the power cable. Allow at least one hour for the lamp to cool before handling.
•
DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS except one lamp cover screw and three lamp housing screws. You could receive an electric shock.
•
Do not break the glass on the lamp housing. Keep finger prints off the glass surface on the lamp housing. Leaving finger prints on the glass surface might cause an unwanted shadow and poor picture quality.
•
The projector will turn off and go into standby mode when you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If this happens, be sure to replace the lamp. If you continue to use the lamp after the lamp reaches the end of its life, the lamp bulb may shatter, and pieces of glass may be scattered in the lamp case. Do not touch them as the pieces of glass may cause injury. If this happens, contact your NEC dealer for lamp replacement.
*NOTE: This message will be displayed under the following conditions: • for one minute after the projector has been powered on • when the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER OFF button on the remote control is pressed To turn off the message, press any button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. To replace the lamp: Optional lamp and tools needed for replacement: • Replacement lamp: NP13LP • Phillips screwdriver or equivalent
E-9
1. Remove the lamp cover. (1) Loosen the lamp cover screw • The lamp cover screw is not removable. (2) Push and slide the lamp cover off.
2. Remove the lamp housing. (1) Loosen the three screws securing the lamp housing until the phillips screwdriver goes into a freewheeling condition. • The three screws are not removable. • There is an interlock on this case to prevent the risk of electrical shock. Do not attempt to circumvent this interlock. (2) Remove the lamp housing by holding it. CAUTION: Make sure that the lamp housing is cool enough to before removing it.
Interlock
E-10
3. Install a new lamp housing. (1) Insert a new lamp housing until the lamp housing is plugged into the socket.
CAUTION Do not use a lamp other than the NEC replacement lamp NP13LP. Order this from your NEC dealer. (2) Push the top center of the lamp housing to secure it. (3) Secure it in place with the three screws. • Be sure to tighten the screws. Hold the cabinet with your hand to keep it from tilting while you tighten the screw.
4. Reattach the lamp cover. (1) Slide the lamp cover back until it snaps into place. (2) Tighten the screw to secure the lamp cover. • Be sure to tighten the screw.
5. Connect the supplied power cable, and turn on the projector. 6. Finally, select the menu → [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] to reset the lamp usage hours. NOTE: When you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life, the projector cannot turn on and the menu is not displayed. If this happens, press the HELP button on the remote control for 10 seconds to reset the lamp clock back to zero. When the lamp time clock is reset to zero, the LAMP indicator goes out.
E-11
Troubleshooting This section helps you resolve problems you may encounter while setting up or using the projector.
Indicator Messages Power Indicator Indicator Condition Off Blinking light
Steady light
Green
Projector Condition
Note
The power cable is unplugged.
–
0.5 sec On, 0.5 sec Off
The projector is getting ready to turn on.
Wait for a moment.
2.5 sec On, 0.5 sec Off
Off Timer is enabled.
–
Green
The projector is turned on.
–
Orange
[NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE]
–
Red
[POWER-SAVING] is selected for [STANDBY – MODE]
Status Indicator Indicator Condition
Blinking light
Steady light
Red
Projector Condition
Note
Normal or Standby ([POWER-SAVING] for – [STANDBY MODE])
Off
1 cycle (0.5 sec Lamp cover error or lamp housing error On, 2.5 sec Off)
Replace the lamp cover or lamp housing correctly.
2 cycle (0.5 sec Temperature error On, 0.5 sec Off)
The projector is overheated. Move the projector to a cooler location.
4 cycle (0.5 sec Fan error On, 0.5 sec Off)
Fans will not work correctly.
6 cycle (0.5 sec Lamp error On, 0.5 sec Off)
Lamp fails to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on again.
Green
Re-firing the lamp (The projector is cooling The projector is re-firing. down.) Wait for a moment.
Green
Standby ([NORMAL] for [STANDBY MODE])
–
Orange
Cabinet button is locked
You have pressed cabinet button when Cabinet Button is locked.
CONTROL ID error
Remote control ID and projector ID are not matched.
Lamp Indicator Indicator Condition Off
Projector Condition Normal
Note –
Blinking light
Red
Lamp has reached its end of life. Lamp replace- Replace the lamp. ment message will be displayed.
Steady light
Red
Lamp has been used beyond its limit. The projec- Replace the lamp. tor will not turn on until the lamp is replaced. – [ECO MODE] is set to [ON]
Green
Over-Temperature Protection If the temperature inside the projector rises too high, the over-temperature protector will automatically turn off the lamp with the STATUS indicator blinking (2-cycle On and Off.) Should this happen, do the following: • Unplug the power cable after the cooling fans stop. • Move the projector to a cooler location if the room where you are presenting is particularly too warm. • Clean the ventilation holes if they are clogged with dust. • Wait about 60 minutes until the inside of the projector becomes cool enough.
E-12
Common Problems & Solutions (→ “Power/Status/Lamp Indicator” on page E-12.) (The numbers in the table refer to pages in the User’s Manual) Problem
Check These Items
Does not turn on or shut down
• Check that the power cable is plugged in and that the power button on the projector cabinet or the remote control is on. (→ pages 17 and 18) • Ensure that the lamp cover is installed correctly. (→ page 72) • Check to see if the projector has overheated. If there is insufficient ventilation around the projector or if the room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location. • Check to see if you continue to use the projector for another 100 hours after the lamp has reached the end of its life. If so, replace the lamp. After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used. (→ page 68) • The lamp may fail to light. Wait a full minute and then turn on the power again. • Set [FAN MODE] to [HIGH ALTITUDE] when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher. Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down. If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector. (→ page 61) If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for some time and then the projector will display the image. Wait for a moment.
Will turn off
• Ensure that the [OFF TIMER] or [AUTO POWER OFF] is off. (→ page 63, 64)
No picture
• Use the COMPUTER1, the VIDEO or the S-VIDEO button on the remote control to select your source (Computer, Video or S-Video). (→ page 20) If there is still no picture, press the button again. • Ensure your cables are connected properly. • Use menus to adjust the brightness and contrast. (→ page 49) • Remove the lens cap. • Reset the settings or adjustments to factory preset levels using the [RESET] in the Menu. (→ page 68) • Enter your registered keyword if the Security function is enabled. (→ page 32) • Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on the power to the notebook PC. In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up. * If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screensaver or power management software. • See also the next page.
Picture suddenly becomes dark
• Check if the projector is in the Forced ECO mode because of too high ambient temperature. If this is the case, lower the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]. (→ page 61)
Color tone or hue is unusual
• Check if an appropriate color is selected in [WALL COLOR]. If so, select an appropriate option. (→ page 55) • Adjust [HUE] in [PICTURE]. (→ page 49)
Image isn’t square to the screen
• Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. (→ page 21) • Use the Keystone correction function to correct the trapezoid distortion. (→ page 24)
Picture is blurred
• Adjust the focus. (→ page 23) • Reposition the projector to improve its angle to the screen. (→ page 21) • Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen is within the adjustment range of the lens. (→ page 10) • Condensation may form on the lens if the projector is cold, brought into a warm place and is then turned on. Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens.
Flicker appears on screen
• Set [FAN MODE] to other than [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters or lower. Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1700 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker. Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO]. (→ page 61)
Image is scrolling vertically, horizontally or both
• Check the computer's resolution and frequency. Make sure that the resolution you are trying to display is supported by the projector. (→ page 80) • Adjust the computer image manually with the Horizontal/Vertical in the [IMAGE OPTIONS]. (→ page 52)
Remote control does not work
• • • •
Indicator is lit or blinking
• See the POWER/STATUS/LAMP Indicator. (→ page 73)
Cross color in RGB mode
• Press the AUTO ADJ. button on the projector cabinet or the remote control. (→ page 26) • Adjust the computer image manually with [CLOCK]/[PHASE] in [IMAGE OPTIONS] in the menu. (→ page 51)
Install new batteries.(→ page 8) Make sure there are no obstacles between you and the projector. Stand within 22 feet (7 m) of the projector. (→ page 8) Make sure that the remote control's ID corresponds with the projector's ID. (→ page 60)
LAN control is not ac• Make sure that [CONTROL TERMINAL] is set correctly. (→ page 64) tive or PC Control is not active Cannot control the projector from external equipment
• Check to see if [STANDBY MODE] is set to [POWER-SAVING] and if it is, try to set it to [NORMAL]. (→ page 63)
3D picture is not display
• See "Troubleshooting on viewing 3D images" on page 42.
For more information contact your dealer.
E-13
If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly. •
Power on process for the projector and the PC. Be sure to connect the projector and notebook PC while the projector is in standby mode and before turning on the power to the notebook PC. In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up. NOTE: You can check the horizontal frequency of the current signal in the projector’s menu under Information. If it reads “0kHz”, this means there is no signal being output from the computer. (→ page 67 (User's Manual) or go to next step)
•
Enabling the computer’s external display. Displaying an image on the notebook PC’s screen does not necessarily mean it outputs a signal to the projector. When using a PC compatible laptop, a combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys gets the external display to come on or off. For example, NEC laptops use Fn + F3, while Dell laptops use Fn + F8 key combinations to toggle through external display selections.
•
Non-standard signal output from the computer If the output signal from a notebook PC is not an industry standard, the projected image may not be displayed correctly. Should this happen, deactivate the notebook PC’s LCD screen when the projector display is in use. Each notebook PC has a different way of deactivate/reactivate the local LCD screens as described in the previous step. Refer to your computer’s documentation for detailed information.
•
Image displayed is incorrect when using a Macintosh When using a Macintosh with the projector, set the DIPswitch of the Mac adapter (not supplied with the projector) according to your resolution. After setting, restart your Macintosh for the changes to take affect. For setting display modes other than those supported by your Macintosh and the projector, changing the DIP switch on a Mac adapter may bounce an image slightly or may display nothing. Should this happen, set the DIP switch to the 13" fixed mode and then restart your Macintosh. After that, restore the DIP switches to a displayable mode and then restart the Macintosh again. NOTE: A Video Adapter cable manufactured by Apple Computer is needed for a PowerBook which does not have a mini D-Sub 15-pin connector.
•
Mirroring on a PowerBook * When using the projector with a Macintosh PowerBook, output may not be set to 1024 x 768 unless “mirroring” is off on your PowerBook. Refer to owner’s manual supplied with your Macintosh computer for mirroring.
•
Folders or icons are hidden on the Macintosh screen Folders or icons may not be seen on the screen. Should this happen, select [View] → [Arrange] from the Apple menu and arrange icons.
E-14
Français
Voici comment utiliser les documents utilisateur fournis Les documents suivants destinés à l’utilisateur sont fournis avec le projecteur.
Informations importantes •
Lire d’abord la section sur les informations importantes. Elle donne des informations sur la sécurité du projecteur, les précautions à observer, le remplacement de la lampe et la localisation des pannes.
Guide d’installation rapide •
Le guide d’installation rapide décrit l’installation initiale et donne des informations d’utilisation concernant la connexion à la source, la mise sous tension, la sélection d’une source et d’autres instructions d’utilisation de base.
Mode d’emploi fourni avec le CD-ROM •
Le mode d’emploi est fourni avec le NEC Projector CD-ROM en format PDF (Portable Document Format) et donne des informations détaillées sur le produit et l’utilisation pour votre projecteur NEC. Le mode d’emploi complet est disponible en 11 langues (anglais, allemand, français, italien, espagnol, portugais, suédois, russe, coréen, chinois simplifié et japonais). Pour visualiser ou imprimer les fichiers PDF Adobe Acrobat Reader™ ou Adobe Reader™. REMARQUE: Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader peut être téléchargé du site Internet de Adobe. Visiter le site http://www.adobe.com et télécharger la version actuelle correspondant à votre système d’exploitation.
•
Pour visualiser le mode d’emploi (PDF) [Windows] 1. Insérer le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de votre ordinateur. 2. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [Poste de travail] sur le bureau de Windows. 3. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [NECPJ] CD-ROM. 4. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [start_menu.pdf]. • Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader démarre et vous permet de visualiser le menu Démarrer. 5. Cliquer sur [Mode d’emploi]. Le menu Index s’affiche. 6. Cliquer sur le titre du chapitre à visualiser. [Macintosh] 1. Insérer le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni dans le lecteur de CD-ROM de votre Macintosh. 2. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [NECPJ] CD-ROM sur le bureau de votre Macintosh. 3. Double-cliquer sur l’icône [start_menu.pdf]. • Adobe Acrobat Reader ou Adobe Reader démarre et vous permet de visualiser le menu Démarrer. 4. Cliquer sur [Mode d’emploi]. Le menu Index s’affiche. 5. Cliquer sur le titre du chapitre à visualiser.
•
Pour copier le manuel d’utilisateur (PDF) sur votre ordinateur: Les mode d’emploi dans le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni peuvent être copiés sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. Dans le NEC Projector CD-ROM fourni, sélectionner [manual] → [French] → [NP216_index_F.pdf] et [NP216_ manual_F.pdf] et les copier sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, consultez le mode d’emploi (format PDF) présent sur le CD-ROM fourni.
F-1
❷ Que contient la boîte ? S’assurer que la boîte contient tous les éléments de la liste. S’il manque des pièces, contacter votre revendeur. Veuillez conserver la boîte et l’emballage d’origine au cas où vous auriez besoin de transporter votre projecteur.
Projecteur
Cache-objectif (24F45801)
Câble d’alimentation (US: 7N080236) (EU: 7N080022)
Câble de signal VGA (7N520073)
Télécommande (7N900881)
Piles (AAAx2)
Pour l’Amérique du Nord uniquement Carte d’enregistrement Limitation de garantie
Pour l’Amérique du Nord Guide de réglage rapide (7N8N0731) Informations Importantes (7N8N0752)
NEC Projector CD-ROM Mode d’emploi (7N951472)
Pour les pays autres que l’Amérique du Nord Guide de réglage rapide (7N8N0731 et 7N8N0741) Informations Importantes (7N8N0752 et 7N8N0762)
F-2
Pour les clients en Europe : Vous trouverez notre garantie actuelle valide sur notre site Web : www.nec-display-solutions. com
Consignes de sécurité Précautions Veuillez lire ce manuel avec attention avant d’utiliser votre projecteur NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 et gardez ce manuel à portée de main afin de pouvoir y recourir facilement.
ATTENTION Pour couper complètement l’alimentation, retirez la prise du secteur. La prise du secteur doit être accessible et installée le plus près possible de l’appareil. ATTENTION POUR ÉVITER TOUT CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE, N’OUVREZ PAS LE BOÎTIER. A L’INTÉRIEUR SE TROUVENT DES COMPOSANTS À HAUTE TENSION. POUR TOUTE RÉPARATION, ADRESSEZ-VOUS À UN RÉPARATEUR AGRÉE. Ce symbole avertit l’utilisateur que le contact avec certaines parties non isolées à l’intérieur de l’appareil risque de causer une électrocution. Il est donc dangereux de toucher quoi que ce soit à l’intérieur de l’appareil. Ce symbole avertit l’utilisateur que d’importantes informations sont fournies sur le fonctionnement ou l’entretien de cet appareil. Ces informations doivent être lues attentivement pour éviter tout problème.
AVERTISSEMENT : AFIN DE PREVENIR TOUT RISQUE D’INCENDIE OU DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE, N’EXPOSEZ PAS CET APPAREIL À LA PLUIE OU À L’HUMIDITÉ. NE PAS UTILISER DE RALLONGE AVEC LA PRISE DE CETTE APPAREIL ET NE PAS NON PLUS LA BRANCHER DANS UNE PRISE MURALE SI TOUTES LES FICHES NE PEUVENT ÊTRE INSÉRÉES COMPLÈTEMENT.
DOC Avis de conformation (pour le Canada uniquement) Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le Matériel Brouilleur du Canada.
Mise au rebut du produit usagé La législation européenne, appliquée dans tous les Etats membres, exige que les produits électriques et électroniques portant la marque (à gauche) doivent être mis au rebut séparément des autres ordures ménagères. Ceci inclus les projecteurs et leurs accessoires électriques ou lampes. Lorsque vous mettez au rebut ces produits, veuillez suivre les recommandations des autorités locales et/ou demandez conseil au magasin qui vous a vendu le produit. Une fois ces produits mis au rebut, ils sont recyclés et de manière appropriée. Cet effort nous aidera à réduire les déchets et leurs conséquences négatives, comme par exemple celles causées par le mercure des lampes sur la santé humaine et sur l’environnement, même à faibles doses. La marque figurant sur les produits électriques et électroniques ne s’applique qu’aux Etats membres actuels de l’Union Européenne.
F-3
Mesures de sécurité importantes Ces instructions de sécurité garantissent la longévité de votre projecteur et préviennent les risques d’incendie et de décharge électrique. Lisez-les et respectez les conseils.
Installation •
Ne placez pas le projecteur dans les endroits suivants : - sur un chariot, un support ou une table instable. - près d’un point d’eau, d’un bain ou dans des pièces humides. - à la lumière directe du soleil, près de chauffages ou d’appareils émettant de la chaleur. - dans un environnement poussiéreux, enfumé ou embué. - sur une feuille de papier, une carpette ou un tapis.
•
Si vous voulez installer le projecteur au plafond : - Ne pas essayer d’installer le projecteur soi-même. - Le projecteur doit être installé par un technicien qualifié pour garantir une installation réussie et réduire le risque d’éventuelles blessures corporelles. - De plus, le plafond doit être suffisamment solide pour supporter le projecteur et l’installation doit être conforme aux réglementations locales de construction. - Veuillez consulter votre revendeur pour de plus amples informations. AVERTISSEMENT • Ne couvrez pas l’objectif avec le cache-objectif fourni ni avec un autre objet lorsque le projecteur est en marche. À défaut de respecter cette consigne, la chaleur provenant de l’émission de lumière pourrait faire fondre le capuchon. • Ne placez pas d’objet pouvant être affecté par la chaleur en face de l’objectif du projecteur. À défaut de respecter cette consigne, la chaleur provenant de l’émission de lumière pourrait faire fondre cet objet.
Placez le projecteur en position horizontale L’angle d’inclinaison du projecteur ne devrait pas excéder 10 degrés. Le projecteur ne devrait pas non plus être installé ailleurs que sur un bureau ou au plafond, sinon la durée de vie de la lampe risque d’être grandement écourtée.
10˚
F-4
Précautions contre l’incendie et l’électrocution •
Veiller à ce que la ventilation soit suffisante et à ce que les bouches ne soient pas obstruées afin d’éviter toute accumulation de chaleur à l’intérieur du projecteur. Laisser un espace d’au moins 4 pouces/10 cm entre le projecteur et le mur.
•
Ne pas essayer de toucher la sortie de l’aération située sur le côté avant car elle peut devenir brûlante lorsque le projecteur est en marche et juste après son extinction.
•
Eviter de faire tomber des corps étrangers comme des trombones et des morceaux de papier dans le projecteur. Ne pas essayer de récupérer des objets tombés dans le projecteur. Ne pas insérer d’objet métallique comme un fil ou un tournevis dans le projecteur. Si quelque chose venait à tomber dans le projecteur, le débrancher immédiatement et demander à un réparateur qualifié de retirer l’objet.
•
Ne placez pas d’objet sur le projecteur.
•
Ne pas toucher la prise d’alimentation pendant un orage. Cela pourrait causer un choc électrique ou un incendie.
•
Le projecteur est conçu pour fonctionner sur une alimentation de 100-240V CA 50/60 Hz. Assurez-vous que l’alimentation correspond à ces exigences avant de commencer à utiliser votre projecteur.
•
Ne pas regarder dans l’objectif lorsque le projecteur est en marche. Cela pourrait provoquer de graves dommages oculaires.
•
Tenir les objets tels qu’une loupe à l’écart du rayon de lumière du projecteur. La lumière projetée par l’objectif est puissante, par conséquent tout objet pouvant rediriger la lumière provenant de l’objectif peut provoquer des dangers inattendus comme un incendie ou blesser les yeux.
•
Ne placez pas d’objet pouvant être affecté par la chaleur en face des orifices de ventilation du projecteur. À défaut de respecter cette consigne, les objets en question pourraient fondre ou vous brûler les mains en raison de la chaleur produite par les orifices de ventilation.
•
Manipulez le câble d’alimentation avec précaution. Un câble endommagé ou égratigné peut entraîner une électrocution ou un incendie. - N’utilisez aucun autre câble d’alimentation que celui fourni. - Ne pliez pas ou n’écrasez pas le câble d’alimentation de manière excessive. - Ne placez pas le câble d’alimentation sous le projecteur ou tout autre objet lourd. - Ne couvrez pas le câble d’alimentation avec d’autres matériaux doux comme des tapis. - Ne soumettez pas le câble d’alimentation à la chaleur. - Ne manipulez pas la prise d’alimentation avec des mains mouillées.
•
Eteindre le projecteur, débrancher le câble d’alimentation et faire réviser l’appareil par un technicien qualifi é dans le cas des problémes suivants : - Le câble ou la prise d’alimentation est endommagé ou égratigné. - Du liquide a été répandu à l’intérieur du projecteur, ou ce dernier a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’eau. - Le projecteur ne fonctionne pas normalement lorsque vous suivez les instructions décrites dans ce mode d’emploi. - Le projecteur est tombé ou le boîtier a été endommagé. - Les performances du projecteur ont décliné, indiquant un besoin de maintenance.
•
Déconnectez le câble d’alimentation et tout autre câble avant de transporter le projecteur.
•
Eteignez le projecteur et débranchez le câble d’alimentation avant de nettoyer le boîtier ou de remplacer la lampe.
•
Eteindre le projecteur et débrancher le câble d’alimentation si le projecteur n’est pas utilisé durant une longue période.
•
Lors de l’utilisation d’un câble LAN (uniquement NP216/NP215) : Pour votre sécurité, ne raccordez pas au connecteur pour périphérique externe de câble pouvant avoir une tension excessive.
F-5
ATTENTION • Ne pas utiliser le pied à inclinaison réglable pour effectuer des réglages autres que ceux initialement prévus. Une utilisation non-prévue du pied d’inclinaison pour porter ou suspendre le projecteur (au mur ou au plafond) peut causer des dommages au projecteur. • Ne pas envoyer le projecteur dans la sacoche souple par service d’expédition ou par un transporteur de fret. Le projecteur se trouvant à l’intérieur de la sacoche souple pourrait être endommagé. • Sélectionner [HAUT] dans le Mode de ventilateur si le projecteur continue à être utilisé pendant plusieurs jours d’affilée. (A partir du menu, sélectionner [PARAM.] → [OPTIONS(1)] → [MODE VENTILATEUR] → [HAUT].) • Ne coupez pas l’alimentation AC dans les 60 secondes qui suivent l’allumage de la lampe et pendant que le témoin POWER clignote en vert. Cela pourrait causer une panne prématurée de la lampe. • Certaines parties du projecteur peuvent se trouver temporairement en surchauffe si le projecteur est éteint avec la touche POWER ou si l’alimentation électrique est coupée pendant une utilisation normale du projecteur. Faites bien attention quand vous soulevez le projecteur.
Précautions se rapportant à la télécommande •
Manipuler la télécommande avec précaution.
•
Si la télécommande est mouillée, l’essuyer immédiatement.
•
Eviter toute chaleur excessive et l’humidité.
•
Ne pas chauffer, démonter ou jeter les piles au feu.
•
Si la télécommande n’est pas utilisée pendant une longue période, retirer les piles.
•
S'assurer de respecter la polarité (+/–) des piles.
•
Ne pas utiliser des piles neuves et des piles usagées en même temps et ne pas utiliser des piles de différents types ensemble.
•
Mettre les piles usagées au rebut d’parés la réglementation locales.
Remplacement de la lampe •
Utilisez la lampe fournie pour plus de sécurité et de performance.
•
Pour remplacer la lampe, suivre toutes les instructions de la page F-9.
•
Veiller à remplacer la lampe lorsque le message [LA LAMPE A ATTEINT SA DURÉE DE VIE MAXIMUM, PRIÈRE DE LA REMPLACER.] apparaît. Si l’on continue à utiliser la lampe après qu’elle ait atteint la fin de service, l’ampoule de la lampe risque de se briser en éclats, et des débris de verre risquent d’être dispersés dans le coffret de la lampe. Ne les touchez pas car ils peuvent vous blesser. Si cela se produit, prendre contact avec votre revendeur pour le remplacement de la lampe.
Caractéristique de la lampe Le projecteur utilise une lampe au mercure à haute-pression comme source lumineuse. Les caractéristiques de la lampe font que sa luminosité décline graduellement avec l’âge. Egalement, le fait d’allumer et d’éteindre fréquemment la lampe favorisera cette perte de luminosité.
ATTENTION: • NE TOUCHEZ PAS LA LAMPE immédiatement après qu’elle a été utilisée. Elle sera extrêmement chaude. Eteignez le projecteur puis débranchez le câble d’alimentation. Attendez au moins une heure que la lampe se soit refroidie avant de la manipuler. • Lors du retrait de la lampe d’un projecteur monté au plafond, assurez-vous que personne ne se trouve sous le projecteur. Des fragments de verre pourraient tomber si la lampe a grillé.
F-6
Précautions de santé pour les utilisateurs qui visionnent des images en 3D Avant tout visionnage, lisez bien le chapitre consacré aux précautions de santé dans le manuel utilisateur disponible avec vos lunettes à obturation LC ou avec vos supports compatibles avec le 3D tels que les DVD, jeux vidéo, fichiers vidéo de votre ordinateur ou autre matériel du même type. Afin d’éviter tout symptôme gênant, veuillez tenir compte de ce qui suit : - N’utilisez pas les lunettes à obturation LC pour visionner autre chose que des images 3D. - Respectez une distance d’au minimum 2 mètres entre l’écran et l’utilisateur. Le fait de regarder des images 3D de trop près peut vous fatiguer les yeux. - Évitez de regarder des images 3D pendant des périodes prolongées. Faites une pause de 15 minutes ou plus après chaque heure de visionnage. - Si vous ou l’un des membres de votre famille avez déjà eu des problèmes de crises dues à une photosensibilité, consultez un médecin avant de regarder des images 3D. - Si, pendant le visionnage d’images 3D, vous avez des sensations d’écœurement, des vertiges, maux de tête, les yeux qui tirent, la vision trouble, des convulsions ou des engourdissements, arrêtez le visionnage. Si les symptômes persistent, consultez un médecin.
A propos du mode Haute Altitude •
Réglez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lorsque le projecteur est utilisé à des altitudes d’environ 5500 pieds/1700 mètres ou plus.
•
Utiliser le projecteur à des altitudes d’environ 5500 pieds/1700 mètres sans régler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut causer une surchauffe et le projecteur pourrait s’éteindre. Si cela se produit, attendez quelques minutes et allumez le projecteur.
•
Utiliser le projecteur à des altitudes moins importantes que 5500 pieds/1700 mètres ou encore moins et régler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut provoquer une baisse de température trop forte de la lampe, et causer une oscillation de l’image. Commutez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [AUTO].
•
Utiliser le projecteur à des altitudes d’environ 5500 pieds/1700 mètres ou plus peut raccourcir la durée de vie des composants optiques tels que la lampe.
À propos des droits d’auteur des images originales projetées : Notez que l’utilisation de ce projecteur dans un but commercial ou pour attirer l’attention du public dans un lieu comme un café ou un hôtel et l’emploi de la compression ou de l’extension d’image d’écran avec les fonctions suivantes risque de constituer une infraction aux droits d’auteur qui sont protégés par la loi sur les droits d’auteur. [RATIO D’ASPECT], [KEYSTONE], Fonction de grossissement et autres fonctions semblables.
F-7
Nettoyage du boîtier et de l’objectif 1. Eteindre le projecteur avant d’effectuer le nettoyage. 2. Nettoyer régulièrement le boîtier avec un chiffon humide. S’il est très sale, utiliser un détergent doux. Ne jamais utiliser de détergent puissant ou des solvants tels que l’alcool ou un dissolvant.
Aspirez la grille d’arrivée de la ventilation du boîtier.
Remarque concernant le nettoyage de l’objectif Utiliser une brosse soufflante ou un papier pour objectif pour nettoyer l’objectif, et veiller à ne pas rayer ou détériorer l’objectif.
F-8
Remplacement de la lampe Lorsque la lampe atteint sa fin de vie, l’indicateur LAMP dans le boîtier va clignoter en rouge. Même si la lampe fonctionne encore, remplacez la lampe pour maintenir une performance de projection optimale. Après avoir remplacé la lampe, penser à remettre le compteur d’heures à zéro. (→ page 68 (Mode d’emploi))
ATTENTION • •
• •
•
Utilisez la lampe fournie pour plus de sécurité et de performance. NE PAS TOUCHER LA LAMPE juste après l'avoir utilisée. Elle est extrêmement chaude. Éteignez le projecteur puis déconnectez le câble d’alimentation. Laissez la lampe refroidir pendant au moins une heure avant de la manipuler. NE RETIRER AUCUNE VIS à l’exception de la vis du couvercle de la lampe et des trois vis du compartiment de la lampe. Une décharge électrique pourrait en résulter. Ne pas briser le verre sur le boîtier de la lampe. Ne pas laisser d’empreintes sur la surface en verre du boîtier de la lampe. Laisser des empreintes sur la surface en verre peut causer une ombre indésirable et une image de mauvaise qualité. Le projecteur s’éteint et se met en mode veille lorsque vous continuez d’utiliser le projecteur dès 100 heures après la fin de vie de la lampe. Dans ce cas, remplacer la lampe. Si cela se produit, assurez-vous de remplacer la lampe. Si vous continuez d’utiliser la lampe après qu’elle soit usagée, la l’ampoule peut se fracasser et des bris de verre peuvent se disperser dans la base de la lampe. Ne les touchez pas car ils peuvent vous blesser. Si cela se produit, prendre contact avec votre revendeur NEC pour le remplacement de la lampe.
* REMARQUE : Ce message s’affichera dans les conditions suivantes : • pendant une minute après que le projecteur a été mis en marche (POWER) sur le boîtier du projecteur ou la touche POWER OFF sur la télécommande est enfoncée • lorsque la touche Pour éliminer le message, appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche du boîtier du projecteur ou de la télécommande. Pour remplacer la lampe : Lampe optionnelle et outils nécessaires pour le remplacement : • Lampe de remplacement : NP13LP • Tournevis Phillips ou équivalent
F-9
1. Retirer le couvercle de la lampe. (1) Dévisser la vis du couvercle de la lampe. • La vis du couvercle de la lampe ne peut pas être retirée. (2) Appuyer sur le couvercle de la lampe et le faire glisser pour le retirer.
2. Retirer le logement de lampe. (1) Desserrez les trois vis fermant le compartiment de la lampe jusqu’à ce que le tournevis phillips tourne dans le vide. • Les trois vis ne peuvent pas être retirées. • Il y a un verrouillage sur ce boîtier pour éviter le risque d’électrocution. N’essayez pas de contourner ce verrouillage. (2) Retirer le boîtier de la lampe en le tenant. ATTENTION : Vérifiez que le boîtier de la lampe est suffisamment froid avant de le retirer.
Emboîtement
F-10
3. Installer un nouveau logement de lampe. (1) Insérer un boîtier de lampe neuve dans la prise.
ATTENTION N’utilisez pas d’autre lampe que la lampe de remplacement NEC NP13LP. Commandez-la chez votre revendeur NEC. (2) Enfoncer le centre du haut du boîtier de la lampe afin qu’il soit bien en place. (3) Fixez-le à l’aide des trois vis. • Assurez-vous de bien visser les deux vis. Tenez le boîtier avec votre main pour l’empêcher de s’incliner pendant que vous serrez la vis.
4. Refixez le couvercle de la lampe. (1) Faire glisser le couvercle de lampe dans l’autre sens jusqu’à ce qu’il soit en place. (2) Serrer la vis pour fixer le couvercle de la lampe. • Assurez-vous de serrer la vis.
5. Connectez le câble d’alimentation fourni et allumez le projecteur. 6. Enfin, sélectionner le menu → [RESET] → [EFFACER HEURES LAMPE] pour réinitialiser les heures d’utilisation de la lampe. REMARQUE : Si vous continuez à utiliser le projecteur plus de 100 heures après que la lampe ait atteint sa fin de vie, le projecteur ne peut pas s’allumer et le menu ne s’affiche pas. Si cela se produit, appuyez sur la touche “HELP” de la télécommande pendant 10 secondes pour réinitialiser l’horloge de la lampe. Lorsque l’horloge de durée de la lampe est réinitialisée, le témoin LAMP disparaît.
F-11
Depistage des pannes Cette section facilite la résolution des problèmes pouvant être rencontrés pendant l’installation ou l’utilisation du projecteur.
Messages des voyants Voyant d’alimentation (POWER) Condition du voyant Arrêt Voyant Vert 0,5 s Marche, clignotant 0,5 s Arrêt 2,5 s Marche, 0,5 s Arrêt Voyant sta- Vert Orange tionnaire Rouge
Condition du projecteur Le câble d’alimentation est débranché. Le projecteur se prépare à s’allumer.
Remarque – Attendre un instant.
La Mise en sommeil est activée.
–
– Le projecteur est allumé. [NORMAL] est sélectionné pour le [MODE – VEILLE] [ÉCONOMIE D'ÉNERGIE] est sélectionné pour le – [MODE VEILLE]
Voyant d’état (STATUS) Condition du voyant
Voyant clignotant
Voyant stationnaire
Condition du projecteur Mode normal ou mode veille ([ÉCONOMIE Arrêt D’ÉNERGIE] pour [MODE VEILLE]) Rouge 1 cycle (0,5 s Problème du couvercle de la lampe ou problème Marche, 2,5 s Arrêt) du boîtier de la lampe 2 cycles (0,5 s Problème de température Marche, 0,5 s Arrêt) 4 cycles (0,5 s Problème de ventilateur Marche, 0,5 s Arrêt) 6 cycles (0,5 s Problème de lampe Marche, 0,5 s Arrêt) Vert Ré-allumage de la lampe (Le projecteur est en cours de refroidissement.) Vert Veille ([NORMAL] pour [MODE VEILLE]) Orange Le VER. PANNEAU COMMANDE est activé. Erreur de CONTRÔLE ID
Remarque – Replacer correctement le couvercle de la lampe ou le boîtier de la lampe. Le projecteur surchauffe. Déplacer le projecteur dans un endroit plus frais. Les ventilateurs ne fonctionnement pas correctement. La lampe ne s’allume pas. Attendre une bonne minute, puis rallumer le projecteur. Le projecteur se rallume. Attendre un instant. – Vous avez appuyé sur la touche du boîtier lorsque le verrouillage du panneau de commande était activé. L'ID de la télécommande et l'ID du projecteur ne correspondent pas.
Voyant de la lampe (LAMP) Condition du voyant Arrêt Rouge
Voyant clignotant Voyant sta- Rouge tionnaire Vert
Condition du projecteur Normal La lampe a atteint la fin de sa durée d’utilisation. Le message de remplacement de la lampe s’affiche. La lampe a été utilisée au-delà de ses limites. Le projecteur ne s’allumera pas tant que la lampe n’a pas été changée. Le [MODE ÉCO] est réglé sur [ACTIVÉ].
Remarque – Remplacer la lampe. Remplacer la lampe. –
Protection contre la surchauffe Si la temperature interne du projecteur devient trop elevee, le dispositif de protection contre la surchauffe eteint automatiquement la lampe en faisant clignoter le voyant STATUS (2 cycles Marche et Arret.) Si cette situation se produit, agissez de la facon suivante : • Debranchez le cable d’alimentation apres que les ventilateurs de refroidissement se sont arretes. • Deplacez le projecteur vers un emplacement plus frais si la piece dans laquelle vous effectuez votre presentation est particulierement chaude. • Nettoyez les orifi ces d’aeration s’ils sont obstrues par la poussiere. • Attendez environ 60 minutes jusqu’a ce que l’interieur du projecteur soit suffi samment refroidi.
F-12
Problèmes courants & Solutions (→ “POWER/STATUS/Voyant LAMP” page F-12.) (Les chiffres figurant dans le tableau font référence aux pages du mode d’emploi.) Problème
Vérifier ces éléments
Ne pas allumer Ou éteindre
• Vérifier que le câble d’alimentation est branché et que la touche d’alimentation du projecteur ou de la télécommande est activée. (→ pages 17 et 18) • Assurez-vous que le couvercle de la lampe est correctement installé. (→ page 72) • Vérifiez que le projecteur ne surchauffe pas. Si la ventilation est insuffisante autour du projecteur ou si la pièce est particulièrement chaude, déplacez le projecteur dans un endroit plus frais. • Vérifier que le projecteur n’est pas utilisé encore 100 heures après que la lampe a atteint la fin de sa durée de vie. Dans ce cas, remplacer la lampe. Si cette durée est dépassée, remplacez la lampe. Après le remplacement de la lampe, réinitialisez le compteur d’heures. (→ page 68) • La lampe peut ne pas s’allumer. Attendre une minute entière, puis rallumer le projecteur. Réglez [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lors de l’utilisation du projecteur à des altitudes d’environ 5500 pieds/1700 mètres ou plus. Utiliser le projecteur sans régler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut causer une surchauffe et le projecteur pourrait s’éteindre. Si cela se produit, attendez quelques minutes et allumez le projecteur. (→ page 61) Si vous mettez le projecteur sous tension immédiatement après que la lampe soit éteinte, le ventilateur fonctionne quelques instants sans qu’aucune image ne s’affiche, puis le projecteur affiche l’image. Attendre un instant.
S’éteint
• Assurez-vous que [MINUT. DÉSACTIVATION] ou [MARCHE AUTO DÉS] est désactivé. (→ page 63, 64)
Absence d’image
• Utiliser la touche COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2, VIDEO ou S-VIDEO de la télécommande pour sélectionner votre source (Ordinateur, Vidéo ou S-Vidéo). (→ page 20) S’il n’y a toujours pas d’image, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche. • S’assurer que les câbles sont connectés correctement. • Utiliser les menus pour ajuster la luminosité et le contraste. (→ page 49) • Retirer le cache-objectif. • Réinitialiser les réglages ou ajustements aux niveaux des préréglages d’usine à l’aide de la [RESET] du menu. (→ page 68) • Entrez votre mot-clé enregistré si la fonction Sécurité est activée. (→ page 32) • Assurez-vous de connecter le projecteur et l’ordinateur portable pendant que le projecteur est en mode de veille et avant d’allumer l’ordinateur portable. Dans la plupart des cas, le signal de sortie de l’ordinateur portable n’est pas activé si ce dernier n’est pas connecté au projecteur avant d’être allumé. * Si l’écran devient vierge lors de l’utilisation de la télécommande, cela peut venir du logiciel économiseur d’écran ou de gestion d’énergie de l’ordinateur. • Voir également la page suivante.
L’image devient subitement sombre
• Vérifier si le projecteur est en mode ECO forcé en raison d’une température ambiante trop élevée. Dans ce cas, abaisser la température interne du projecteur en sélectionnant [HAUT] pour [MODE VENTILATEUR]. (→ page 61)
La couleur ou la teinte n’est pas normale
• Vérifier si une couleur appropriée est sélectionnée dans [COULEUR MURALE]. Si oui, sélectionner une option appropriée. (→ page 55) • Régler [TEINTE] dans [IMAGE]. (→ page 49)
L’image n’est pas carrée à l’écran
• Repositionner le projecteur pour améliorer l’angle par rapport à l’écran. (→ page 21) • Utiliser la fonction Keystone pour corriger la distorsion trapézoïdale. (→ page 24)
L’image est floue
• • • •
Une oscillation apparaît à l’écran
• Réglez le [MODE VENTILATEUR] sur un autre mode que [HAUTE ALTITUDE] lors de l’utilisation du projecteur à des altitudes moins importantes qu’environ 5500 pieds/1700 mètres. Utiliser le projecteur à des altitudes moins importantes que 5500 pieds/1700 mètres et le régler sur [HAUTE ALTITUDE] peut causer un refroidissement de la lampe, créant une oscillation de l’image. Commutez du mode [MODE VENTILATEUR] à [AUTO]. (→ page 61)
L’image défile verticalement, horizontalement ou dans les deux sens
• Contrôlez la résolution et la fréquence de l’ordinateur. Assurez-vous que la résolution que vous tentez d’afficher est supportée par le projecteur. (→ page 80) • Ajuster manuellement l’image de l’ordinateur avec Horizontale/Verticale dans [OPTIONS D’IMAGE]. (→ page 52)
La télécommande ne fonctionne pas
• • • •
Le voyant est allumé ou clignote
• Voir le voyant POWER/STATUS/LAMP. (→ page 73)
Couleurs mélangées en mode RGB
• Appuyez sur la touche AUTO ADJ. du boîtier du projecteur ou de la télécommande. (→ page 26) • Réglez manuellement l’image de l’ordinateur avec [HORLOGE]/[PHASE] dans [OPTIONS D’IMAGE] dans le menu. (→ page 51)
L’unité de contrôle du réseau local (LAN) ou celle du PC n’est pas activée.
• Assurez-vous que [BORNE DE CONTRÔLE] soit réglé correctement. (→ page 64)
Impossible de contrôler le projecteur à partir d’un appareil externe
• Vérifiez si [MODE VEILLE] est réglé sur [ÉCONOMIE D’ÉNERGIE] et s’il l’est, essayez de le régler sur [NORMAL]. (→ page 63)
La photo 3D n’est pas affichée
• Voir « Dépistage des pannes concernant la visualisation des images 3D » à la page 42.
Ajuster la mise au point. (→ page 23) Repositionner le projecteur pour améliorer l’angle par rapport à l’écran. (→ page 21) S’assurer que la distance entre le projecteur et l’écran est dans l’intervalle de réglage de l’objectif. (→ page 10) Une condensation risque de se former sur l’objectif si le projecteur est froid, déplacé dans un endroit chaud puis mis en marche. Si cela se produit, ne pas toucher le projecteur et attendre qu’il n’y ait plus de condensation sur l’objectif.
Installer des piles neuves. (→ page 8) S’assurer qu’il n’y a pas d’obstacle entre vous et le projecteur. Se mettre à 7m du projecteur. (→ page 8) Assurez-vous que l’ID de la télécommande corresponde à celui du projecteur. (→ page 60)
Pour plus d’informations, contacter votre vendeur.
F-13
S’il n’y a pas d’image ou si l’image ne s’affiche pas correctement. •
Procédure de mise en marche pour le projecteur et le PC. Assurez-vous de connecter le projecteur et l’ordinateur portable pendant que le projecteur est en mode de veille et avant d’allumer l’ordinateur portable. Dans la plupart des cas, le signal de sortie de l’ordinateur portable n’est pas activé si ce dernier n’est pas connecté au projecteur avant d’être allumé. REMARQUE : Vous pouvez vérifier la fréquence horizontale du signal actuel dans le menu du projecteur sous Informations. S’il indique “0kHz”, cela signifie qu’aucun signal n’est envoyé par l’ordinateur. Voir page 67 (Mode d’emploi) ou aller à l’étape suivante.
•
Activation de l’affichage externe de l’ordinateur. L’affichage d’une image sur l’écran du PC portable ne signifie pas nécessairement qu’il envoie un signal vers le projecteur. Lors de l’utilisation d’un PC portable, une combinaison de touches de fonction active/désactive l’affichage externe. En général, la combinaison de la touche “Fn” avec l’une des 12 touches de fonction permet l’allumage ou l’extinction de l’affichage externe. Par exemple, les ordinateurs portables NEC utilisent Fn + F3, tandis que les ordinateurs portables Dell utilisent la combinaison de touches Fn + F8 pour alterner entre les sélections d’affichage externe.
•
Envoi d’un signal non-standard par l’ordinateur Si le signal envoyé par un ordinateur portable n’est pas un standard industriel, l’image projetée peut ne pas s’afficher correctement. Si cela se produit, désactiver l’écran LCD de l’ordinateur portable lorsque l’affichage du projecteur est en cours d’utilisation. Chaque ordinateur portable a une façon différente de désactiver/réactiver les écrans LCD locaux comme décrit à l’étape précédente. Se référer à la documentation de votre ordinateur pour de plus amples informations.
•
L’image affichée est incorrecte lors de l’utilisation d’un Macintosh Lors de l’utilisation d’un Macintosh avec le projecteur, régler le commutateur DIP de l’adaptateur Mac (non fourni avec le projecteur) en fonction de votre résolution. Après le réglage, redémarrer votre Macintosh pour que les changements soient effectifs. Pour le réglage des modes d’affichage autres que ceux supportés par votre Macintosh et le projecteur, Le changement du commutateur DIP sur un adaptateur Mac peut faire sauter légèrement l’image ou ne rien afficher. Si cela se produit, régler le commutateur DIP sur le mode fixe 13”, puis redémarrer votre Macintosh. Après cela, rétablir les commutateur DIP sur un mode affichable, puis redémarrer à nouveau votre Macintosh. REMARQUE : Un câble Adaptateur Vidéo fabriqué par Apple Computer est nécessaire pour un PowerBook qui ne possède pas de connecteur mini D-Sub à 15 broches.
•
Reflet sur un PowerBook * Lorsque le projecteur est utilisé avec un PowerBook Macintosh, la sortie ne peut pas être réglée sur 1024 x 768 à moins que “reflet” soit désactivé sur votre PowerBook. Se référer au mode d’emploi fourni avec votre ordinateur Macintosh au sujet du reflet.
•
Les dossiers ou les icônes sont cachés sur l’écran du Macintosh Les dossiers ou les icônes peuvent ne pas être vus sur l’écran. Si cela se produit, sélectionner [View] → [Arrange] dans le menu Apple et arranger les icônes.
F-14
Español
Utilización de los documentos de usuario suministrados Los siguientes documentos del usuario se encuentran incluidos con el proyector.
Información importante •
Lea primero la información importante. Esta cubre información referente a la seguridad del proyector, precauciones, cambio de la lámpara y solución de problemas.
Guía rápida de configuración •
La guía rápida de configuración proporciona información sobre la configuración inicial y el uso respecto a la conexión de fuente, activación de la alimentación, selección de una fuente y otras instrucciones de funcionamiento básicas.
Manual del usuario en CD-ROM •
El manual del usuario completo se suministra en el NEC Projector CD-ROM en formato PDF (Portable Document Format) y proporciona información detallada sobre el producto y su utilización para el proyector NEC. El manual está disponible en 11 idiomas (Inglés, Alemán, Francés, Italiano, Español, Portugués, Sueco, Ruso, Coreano, Chino simplificado y Japonés). Para ver o imprimir los archivos con formato PDF utilice el programa Adobe Acrobat Reader™ o Adobe Reader™. NOTA: Los programas Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se pueden descargar en la página web de Adobe. Visite http://www.adobe.com y obtenga la versión actual para su SO (sistema operativo).
•
Para ver el manual del usuario (PDF) [Windows] 1. Coloque el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado en la unidad de CD-ROM de su ordenador personal. 2. Haga doble clic en el icono [Mi PC] en el escritorio de Windows. 3. Haga doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM [NECPJ]. 4. Haga doble clic en [start_menu.pdf]. • Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se iniciara y le permitirán visualizar el menú de Incio. 5. Haga clic en [Manual del usuario]. El menú del índice se visualizará. 6. Haga clic en el título del capítulo que desea visualizar. [Macintosh] 1. Coloque el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado en la unidad de CD-ROM de si ordenador Macintosh. 2. Haga doble clic en el icono del CD-ROM [NECPJ] en el escritorio de Macintosh. 3. Haga doble clic en [start_menu.pdf]. • Adobe Acrobat Reader o Adobe Reader se iniciará y le permitirá visualizar el menú de Inicio. 4. Haga clic en [Manual del usuario]. El menú del índice se visualizará. 5. Haga clic en el título del capítulo que desea visualizar.
•
Para copiar el manual del usuario (PDF) a su ordenador: Es posible copiar en la unidad de disco duro de su ordenador los manuales de usuario que vienen en el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado. En el NEC Projector CD-ROM suministrado seleccione [manual] → [Spanish] → [NP216_index_S.pdf] y [NP216_ manual_S.pdf] y copie dichos archivos en la unidad de disco duro de su ordenador. Consulte el manual del usuario (formato PDF) en el CD-ROM suministrado para obtener información detallada.
S-1
¿Cuál es le contenido de la caja? Asegúrese de que la caja contiene todos los elementos que aparecen en la lista. Si falta alguna pieza, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor. Conserve la caja y los materiales de embalaje originales por si tiene que transportar el proyector. Proyector
Tapa de la lente (24F45801)
Cable de alimentación (US: 7N080236) (EU: 7N080022)
Cable de señal VGA (7N520073)
Mando a distancia (7N900881)
Pilas (AAA × 2)
Sólo para Norteamérica Tarjeta de registro Garantía limitada
Para Norte América Guía de instalación rápida (7N8N0731) Información importante (7N8N0752)
NEC Projector CD-ROM Manual del usuario (7N951472)
Para otros países que no sea Norte América Guía de instalación rápida (7N8N0731 y 7N8N0741) Información importante (7N8N0752 y 7N8N0762)
S-2
Para clientes en Europa: Tiene a su disposición la Póliza de garantía en nuestra página web: www.nec-display-solutions.com
Precauciones Precaución Lea con cuidado este manual antes de utilizar el proyector NEC NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 y tenga el manual a mano para poder consultarlo más adelante. PRECAUCIÓN Para desactivar la alimentación asegúrese de extraer el enchufe de la toma de red eléctrica. La toma de red debe estar lo más cerca posible del equipo, y además debe ser fácilmente accesible.
PRECAUCIÓN PARA EVITAR DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS, NO ABRA LA CAJA. EN EL INTERIOR HAY COMPONENTES CON ALTA TENSIÓN. ACUDA A PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CUALIFICADO. Este símbolo advierte al usuario de la presencia de tensión sin aislamiento dentro del equipo suficiente como para causar descargas eléctricas. Por lo tanto, es peligroso realizar cualquier tipo de contacto con cualquier pieza del interior del equipo. Este símbolo alerta al usuario de la presencia de información importante concerniente al funcionamiento y mantenimiento del equipo. Debe leerse atentamente la información para evitar problemas. ADVERTENCIA: PARA EVITAR FUEGO O DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS, NO EXPONGA ESTE EQUIPO A LA LLUVIA NI A LA HUMEDAD. NO UTILICE EL ENCHUFE DE ESTE EQUIPO CON UN CABLE ALARGADOR O EN UNA TOMA DE PARED A MENOS QUE LOS CONTACTOS SE PUEDAN INSERTAR COMPLETAMENTE.
Cómo deshacerse del producto utilizado La legislación de la UE puesta en práctica en cada estado miembro requiere que los productos eléctricos y electrónicos que lleven la marca (izquierda) deben de deshacerse separadamente de la basura normal. Esto incluye proyectores y sus accesorios eléctricos o lámparas. Cuando se deshaga de tales productos, siga los consejos de su autoridad local o pregunte en la tienda en la que adquirió el producto. Después de recoger los productos utilizados, se vuelven a utilizar y a reciclar de forma adecuada. Este esfuerzo nos ayuda a reducir los deshechos así como los impactos negativos, tales como el que el mercurio de las lámparas lleva a cabo en la salud humana y en el medioambiente, a un nivel mínimo. La marca en los productos eléctricos y electrónicos se aplica sólo a los actuales estados miembros de la Unión Europea.
S-3
Importante para su seguridad Estas instrucciones de seguridad son para garantizar una larga vida de su proyector y para evitar incendios y descargas eléctricas. Léalas detenidamente y respete todas las advertencias.
Instalación • No coloque el proyector en las siguientes condiciones: - en una mesa con ruedas, soporte o mesa inestables. - cerca de agua, baños o habitaciones húmedas. - bajo la luz directa del sol, cerca de calefacciones o dispositivos que radien calor. - en un entorno polvoriento, con humo o con vapor. - sobre una hoja de papel o paño, alfombrillas o alfombras. • Si desea instalar el proyector en el techo: - No intente instalar el proyector usted mismo. - El proyector debe de ser instalado por técnicos cualificados para asegurar un funcionamiento adecuado y reducir el riesgo de lesiones corporales. - Además, el techo debe de ser lo suficientemente fuerte como para soportar el proyector y la instalación debe de realizarse de acuerdo con las normas de edificios locales. - Por favor consulte a su distribuidor para mayor información. ADVERTENCIA: • No cubra la lente con el protector de lente ni con ningún otro objeto similar mientras el proyector esté encendido. En caso contrario, el calor que emite la luz proyectada podría derretir el protector. • No sitúe ningún objeto sensible al calor delante de la lente del proyector. En caso contrario, el calor que emite la luz proyectada podría derretir el objeto.
Ponga el proyector en posición horizontal El ángulo de inclinación del proyector no debe exceder de 10 grados. Tampoco se debe instalar el proyector de ninguna forma diferente a la instalación de sobremesa o techo, ya que de lo contrario la vida útil de la lámpara puede reducirse considerablemente.
10°
S-4
Precauciones ante fuegos y descargas eléctricas • Asegúrese de que existe una ventilación suficiente que los ventiladores no presentan obstrucciones para evitar la acumulación de calor en el interior del proyector. Deje un mínimo de 4 pulgadas (10 cm) de espacio entre su proyector y las paredes que lo rodean. • No intente tocar la salida de ventilación de la parte delantera, ya que puede calentarse mientras permanezca encendido el proyector e inmediatamente después de apagarlo.
• Evite que objetos extraños, como clips y trozos de papel, caigan sobre el proyector. No intente recuperar ningún objeto que pueda haber caído en el proyector. No inserte ningún objeto metálico, como un cable o un destornillador, en el proyector. Si algún objeto cayese en el interior de su proyector, desconéctelo inmediatamente y deje que un miembro del personal de servicio técnico retire el objeto de su proyector. • No coloque ningún objeto su proyector. • No toque el enchufe de alimentación durante una tormenta. De lo contrario, podria recibir una descarga eléctrica o podria producirse un incendio. • El proyector está diseñado para funcionar con una fuente de alimentación de 100 a 240 V de CA a 50/60 Hz. Asegúrese de que su fuente de alimentación cumple estos requisitos antes de utilizar el proyector. • No mire directamente a la lente mientras el proyector está encendido. Podría producir lesiones graves en sus ojos.
• Mantenga cualquier objeto similar a una lupa fuera de la trayectoria de la luz del proyector. La luz proyectada desde la lente es extensiva, de modo que cualquier objeto anómalo que pueda redirigir la luz que sale de la lente puede provocar resultados impredecibles, como fuego o lesiones en los ojos. • No sitúe ningún objeto sensible al calor delante del ventilador. En caso contrario, podría derretirse el objeto o se podría quemar las manos debido al calor que expulsa el ventilador. • Manipule el cable de alimentación con cuidado. Un cable de alimentación dañado o deshilachado puede causar descargas eléctricas o un incendio. - No utilice ningún otro cable de alimentación que el suministrado. - No doble ni tire excesivamente del cable de alimentación. - No coloque el cable de alimentación debajo del proyector o debajo de ningún objeto pesado. - No cubra el cable de alimentación con materiales blandos tales como alfombrillas. - No caliente el cable de alimentación. - No manipule el cable de alimentación con las manos mojadas. • Apague el proyector, desenchufe el cable de alimentación y lleve el proyector a un servicio tecnico cualifi - cado si ocurren las siguientes condiciones:
• • • •
- Cuando el cable de alimentación o enchufe está dañado o deshilachado. - Si se ha derramado líquido dentro del proyector o si ha estado expuesto a la lluvia o al agua. - Si el proyector no funciona de forma normal cuando siga las siguientes instrucciones descritas en el manual del usuario. - Si el proyector se ha caído o si se ha dañado la caja. - Si el proyector muestra un cambio en el rendimiento que indiquen que necesita servicio. Desconecte el cable de alimentación y demás cables antes de transportar el proyector. Desactive el proyector y desenchufe el cable de alimentación antes de limpiar la caja o reemplazar la lámpara. Apague el proyector y desenchufe el cable de alimentación si el proyector no se utilizara por un largo periodo de tiempo. Cuando utilice un cable LAN (sólo para NP216/NP215): Por seguridad, no realice la conexión del conector para cableado de dispositivos periféricos que pueda tener un voltaje excesivo.
S-5
PRECAUCIÓN • No utilice la pata de inclinación con otro propósito que no sea el originalmente establecido. El uso incorrecto, como la utilización de la pata de inclinación para transportar o colgar (en una pared o techo) el proyector pueden dañar el proyector. • No envíe el estuche blando por servicios de entrega de paquetes o envíos de carga. Es posible que el proyector en el interior del estuche blando se dañe. • Seleccione el modo de ventilador [ALTO] si utiliza el proyector de forma continuada durante más de un día. (En el menú, seleccione [CONFIG.] → [OPCIONES(1)] → [MODO DE VENTILADOR] → [ALTO]). • No desactive la alimentación de CA durante 60 segundos después de que se active la lámpara y mientras el indicador POWER parpadea en verde. De lo contrario, la lámpara podría sufrir fallo prematuro. • Piezas del proyector podrían llegar a calentarse temporalmente si se apaga el proyector con el botón POWER o si desconecta el suministro de alimentación CA durante la operación del proyector de forma normal. Tenga precaución al recoger el proyector.
Precauciones con el mendo a distancia • • • • • • • •
Manipule el mando a distancia con cuidado. Si se moja el mando a distancia, límpielo y séquelo inmediatamente. Evite el calor y humedad excesivos. No caliente, desarme ni arroje las pilas al fuego. Cuando no vaya a usar el mando a distancia por un período prolongado de tiempo, retire las pilas. Asegúrese de que la polaridad (+/–) de las pilas sea correcta. No utilice pilas nuevas y usadas al mismo tiempo y no mezcle pilas de distinto tipo. Deseche las pilas utilizadas según las regulaciones locales.
Sustitución de la lámpara • • •
Use la lámpara especificada para garantizar la seguridad y el desempeño. Para sustituir la lámpara, siga todas las instrucciones que aparecen en la página S-9. Asegúrese de reemplazar la lámpara cuando aparezca el mensaje [LA LÁMPARA HA LLEGADO AL TÉRMINO DE SU VIDA ÚTIL. REEMPLACE LA LÁMPARA.]. Si continúa utilizando la lámpara después de que ésta haya alcanzado el final de su vida útil, la bombilla de la lámpara podría estallar y las piezas de cristal podrían esparcirse por la caja de la lámpara. No toque los trozos de vidrio, pues podría cortarse. Si esto sucediera, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor para el recambio de la lámpara.
Características de una lámpara El proyector tiene una lámpara de mercurio de alta presión como fuente de luz. La característica de la lámpara es que el brillo va disminuyendo gradualmente con el paso del tiempo. También si se enciende y se apaga la lámpara con mucha frecuencia aumentará la posibilidad de que brille menos.
PRECAUCIÓN: • NO TOQUE LA LÁMPARA inmediatamente después de que ha estado en uso; estará extremadamente caliente. Apague el proyector y desconecte el cable de alimentación. Permita que la lámpara se enfríe durante al menos una hora antes de manipularla. • Al retirar la lámpara de un proyector instalado en el techo, asegúrese de que no se encuentre nadie debajo. Fragmentos de cristal podrían caerse si se ha quemado la lámpara.
S-6
Precauciones de salud para los usuarios al visualizar imágenes en 3D Antes de la visualización, asegúrese de leer los consejos de cuidado sanitario que se encuentran en el manual del usuario incluido con sus gafas LCD de obturación o con sus archivos compatibles de 3D como por ejemplo DVD, video juegos, archivos de video de ordenador, etc. Para evitar síntomas adversos, preste atención a lo siguiente: - No utilice las gafas LCD de obturación para la visualización de materiales que no sean imágenes en 3D. - Mantenga una distancia de 2 m o más entre la pantalla y el usuario. Visualizar imágenes en 3D desde una distancia demasiado corta puede dañar sus ojos. - Evite la visualización de imágenes en 3D durante prolongados períodos de tiempo. Tome un descanso de 15 minutos o más después de cada hora de visualización. - Si usted o cualquier otro miembro de su familia tiene antecedentes de convulsiones por sensibilidad a la luz, consulte a su médico antes de ver imágenes en 3D. - Mientras visualiza imágenes en 3D, si siente algún malestar como por ejemplo náusea, mareo, vértigo, dolor de cabeza, fatiga visual, visión nublosa, convulsiones, y entumecimiento, deje de verlas. Si los síntomas continúan, busque asistencia médica.
Acerca del modo de altitud elevada •
Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores.
•
Utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros sin ajustar en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] puede causar que el proyector se sobre caliente y que el protector pueda apagar. Si esto sucede, espere un par de minutos y encienda el proyector.
•
Utilizar el proyector en altitudes inferiores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros o menores y ajustando en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] puede causar que la lámpara se sobre enfríe, provocando que la imagen se mueva rápido. Cambie [MODO DE VENTILADOR] a [AUTO].
•
Utilizar el proyector en altitudes aproximadamente de 5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores puede acortar la vida de los componentes ópticos como por ejemplo la lámpara.
Sobre los derechos de reproducción de las imágenes originales proyectadas: No olvide que la utilización de este proyector para fines comerciales lucrativos o para atraer la atención del público en lugares como cafeterías u hoteles, y el empleo de la compresión o la expansión de la imagen en pantalla con las subsiguientes funciones, podría originar problemas por la violación de los derechos de reproducción protegidos por la ley de propiedad intelectual. [RELACIÓN DE ASPECTO], [KEYSTONE], Función de aumento y otras funciones similares.
S-7
Limpieza de la cubierta y de la lente 1. Apague el proyector antes de limpiarlo. 2. Limpie la cubierta periódicamente con un paño húmedo. Si está muy sucia, utilice un detergente suave. No utilice nunca detergentes o disolventes fuertes tales como alcohol o diluyente.
Utilice una aspiradora para limpiar la entrada de ventilación de la caja.
Nota sobre limpieza de lentes Utilice un pincel soplador o papel óptico para limpiar la lente, y procure no rayar ni estropear la lente.
S-8
Reemplazo de la lámpara Cuando la duración de la lámpara haya llegado a su fin, el indicador LAMP de la cubierta parpadeará en rojo. Aunque la lámpara continúe funcionando, sustitúyala para que el proyector siga presentando un rendimiento óptimo. Después de reemplazar la lámpara, asegúrese de borrar el contador de hora de lámpara. (→ página 68 (Manual del usuario))
PRECAUCIÓN •
Use la lámpara especificada para garantizar la seguridad y el desempeño.
•
NO TOQUE LA LÁMPARA inmediatamente después de que haya estado en uso. La lámpara estará extremadamente caliente. Primero apague el proyector, y después desenchufe el cable de alimentación. Antes de manipular la lámpara espere por lo menos una hora hasta que se enfríe.
•
NO QUITE NINGÚN TORNILLO, excepto el tornillo de la cubierta de la lámpara y tres tornillos de la caja de la lámpara. De lo contrario, podría recibir una descarga eléctrica.
•
No rompa el cristal del bastidor de la lámpara. Asegúrese de no dejar huellas digitales en la superficie de cristal del bastidor de la lámpara. La presencia de huellas digitales en la superficie de cristal puede causar sombras no deseadas y mala calidad de imagen.
•
El proyector se apagará y pasará al modo de espera si sigue utilizándolo durante 100 horas más una vez que la duración de la lámpara haya llegado a su fin. Si esto sucediera, asegúrese de reemplazar la lámpara. Si se produce esta situación, asegúrese de sustituir la lámpara. Si sigue utilizando la lámpara una vez que su duración haya llegado a su fin, es posible que la bombilla se rompa y los trozos de cristal se dispersen en el compartimento de la lámpara. No toque los trozos de vidrio, pues podría cortarse. Si esto sucediera, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor NEC para el recambio de la lámpara.
* NOTA: Este mensaje aparecerá bajo las siguientes condiciones: • un minuto después de que el proyector se ha encendido • cuando se pulsa el botón (POWER) en la cabina del proyector o se pulsa el botón POWER OFF en el mando a distancia Para eliminar este mensaje, pulse cualquier botón en la cabina del proyector o en el mando a distancia. Para reemplazar la lámpara: Lámpara opcional y herramientas necesarias para el reemplazo: • Lámpara de repuesto: NP13LP • Destornillador Phillips o equivalente
S-9
1. Quite la tapa de la lámpara. (1) Afloje el tornillo de la cubierta de la lámpara. • El tornillo de la cubierta de la lámpara no se puede sacar. (2) Empuje y deslice la cubierta de la lámpara.
2. Quite la cubierta de la lámpara. (1) Afloje los tres tornillos que aseguran la caja de la lámpara hasta que el destornillador Phillips gire libremente. • Los tres tornillos no se pueden quitar. • El alojamiento posee un seguro para evitar el riesgo de descargas eléctricas. No intente franquear este seguro. (2) Extraiga la cubierta de la lámpara sujetándola.
PRECAUCIÓN: Asegúrese de que el alojamiento de la lámpara se encuentra a baja temperatura antes de sacarlo.
Ínter bloqueo
S-10
3. Instale una nueva cubierta de la lámpara. (1) Introduzca un nuevo bastidor de lámpara hasta que el bastidor de lámpara esté introducido en la toma.
PRECAUCIÓN Utilice solamente la lámpara de repuesto NEC NP13LP. Haga su pedido a su distribuidor NEC. (2) Empuje en el centro superior del alojamiento de la lámpara para que quede fijo. (3) Fíjelo en su sitio con los tres tornillos. • Asegúrese de apretar los dos tornillos. Agarre la carcasa con su mano para evitar se vuelque mientras aprieta el tornillo.
4. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta de la lámpara. (1) Deslice la tapa de la lámpara hasta que encaje en posición. (2) Apriete el tornillo para cerrar la cubierta de la lámpara. • Asegúrese de apretar bien el tornillo.
5. Conecte el cable de alimentación suministrado y encienda el proyector. 6. Finalmente, seleccione el menú → [REAJ.] → [BORRAR HORAS DE LA LÁMPARA] para borrar las horas de uso de la lámpara. NOTA: Si sigue utilizando el proyector durante 100 horas más una vez que la duración de la lámpara haya llegado a su fin, el proyector no se podrá encender ni se mostrará el menú. Si esto sucediera, pulse el botón HELP en el mando a distancia durante 10 segundos para reajustar el reloj de la lámpara a cero. Cuando el reloj de tiempo de uso de la lámpara se ajusta a cero, el indicador LAMP se apaga.
S-11
Detección de fallos Esta sección le ayuda a resolver eventuales problemas que puede tener al ajustar o utilizar el proyector.
Mensajes de los indicadores Indicador de alimentación (POWER) Condición del indicador Apagado Luz intermi- Verde 0,5 seg. Encendido, tente 0,5 seg. Apagado 2,5 seg. Encendido, 0,5 seg. Apagado Luz fija Verde Naranja
Condición del proyector El cable de alimentación esta desenchufado. El proyector se está preparando para encenderse. El temporizador de desconexión está activado. El proyector se está enfriando. Se selecciona [NORMAL] para [MODO DE ESPERA] Se selecciona [AHORRO DE ENERGÍA] para [MODO DE ESPERA]
Nota – Espere unos instantes.
Condición del proyector Normal o Modo de espera ([AHORRO DE Apagado ENERGÍA] para [MODO DE ESPERA]) Luz intermi- Rojo 1 ciclo (0,5 seg. Encendi- Error en la cubierta de la lámpara o error en tente do, 2,5 seg. Apagado) el bastidor de la lámpara 2 ciclo (0,5 seg. Encendi- Error de temperatura do, 0,5 seg. Apagado) 4 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendi- Error de ventilador do, 0,5 seg. Apagado) 6 ciclos (0,5 seg. Encendi- Error de la lámpara do, 0,5 seg. Apagado) Verde Reencendido de la lámpara (El proyector se está enfriando.) Luz fija Verde Modo de espera ([NORMAL] para [MODO DE ESPERA]) Naranja La función [BLOQ. PANEL DE CONT.] está activada. Error de ID DE CONTROL
Nota
Rojo
– – – –
Indicador de estado (STATUS) Condición del indicador
– Reemplace correctamente la cubierta de la lámpara o el bastidor de la lámpara. El proyector se ha recalentado. Traslade el proyector a un lugar más fresco. Los ventiladores no funcionan correctamente. La lámpara no se enciende. Espere un minuto completo y luego vuelva a encenderla. El proyector se vuelve a encender. Espere unos instantes. – Ha pulsado un botón del proyector con la función Bloqueo del panel de control activada. El ID del mando a distancia no coincide con el ID del proyector.
Indicador de lámpara (LAMP) Condición del indicador Apagado Luz intermi- Rojo tente Luz fija Rojo Verde
Condición del proyector Normal La lámpara ha llegado al término de su vida útil. Se visualiza el mensaje de reemplazo de la lámpara. Se ha sobrepasado el límite de uso de la lámpara. El proyector no se encenderá hasta que la lámpara sea reemplazada. La [MODO ECO] se encuentra en el [ACT.].
Nota – Reemplace la lámpara. Reemplace la lámpara. –
Protección contra sobretemperatura Si la temperatura en el interior del proyector aumenta excesivamente, el dispositivo de protección contra sobretemperatura apagará automáticamente la lámpara y el indicador STATUS comenzará a parpadear (2 ciclos de Encendido y Apagado.) Si esto sucediera, haga lo siguiente: • Desenchufe el cable de alimentación una vez que los ventiladores de enfriamiento se hayan detenido. • Traslade el proyector a un lugar más fresco si la habitación en que se encuentra es excesivamente calurosa. • Limpie los orifi cios de ventilación si están obstruidos con polvo. • Espere aproximadamente 60 minutos hasta que el interior del proyector se enfríe.
S-12
Problemas comunes y sus soluciones (→ “Indicador de alimentación/estado/lámpara” en la página S-12.) (Los números en la tabla se refieren a los números de las páginas en el manual del usuario.) Problema
Compruebe los siguientes puntos
No encienda O apague
• Compruebe que el cable de alimentación está conectado y que el botón de alimentación del proyector o del mando a distancia está activado. (→ páginas 17, 18) • Asegúrese de que la cubierta de la lámpara esté instalada correctamente. (→ página 72) • Compruebe para ver si el proyector se ha sobrecalentado. Si no hay suficiente ventilación alrededor del proyector o si la habitación donde se lleva a cabo la presentación es particularmente calurosa, lleve el proyector a un lugar más fresco. • Compruebe si puede seguir utilizando el proyector durante 100 horas más una vez que la duración de la lámpara haya llegado a su fin. En tal caso, reemplace la lámpara. Después de reemplazar la lámpara, reajuste las horas de lámpara utilizadas. (→ página 68) • La lámpara puede no encenderse. Espere un minuto completo y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentación. • Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores. Utilizar el proyector en altitudes de aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros o mayores sin ajustar en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] puede causar que el proyector se sobre caliente y que el protector pueda apagar. Si esto sucede, espere un par de minutos y encienda el proyector. (→ página 61) Si enciende el proyector inmediatamente después de que se apague la lámpara, los ventiladores funcionarán sin visualizar una imagen durante un tiempo y luego el proyector mostrará la imagen. Espere unos instantes.
El proyector se apaga
• Asegúrese de que las funciones [TEMPOR. DESACTIVADO] y [ENC. AUTO. DESACT.] están deshabilitadas. (→ página 63, 64)
No hay imagen
• Utilice el botón COMPUTER1, VIDEO o S-VIDEO del mando a distancia para seleccionar la fuente (Ordenador, Vídeo o S-Vídeo). (→ página 20) Si todavía no aparece ninguna imagen, pulse nuevamente el botón. • Asegúrese de que los cables están conectados correctamente. • Use los menús para ajustar el brillo y el contraste. (→ página 49) • Quite la tapa de la lente. • Restablezca los ajustes y configuraciones a los valores preajustados de fábrica seleccionando la opción [REAJ.] del menú. (→ página 68) • Si la función de seguridad está habilitada, introduzca la palabra clave registrada. (→ página 32) • Asegúrese de conectar el proyector y el PC portátil mientras que el proyector se encuentre en el modo de espera y antes de activar la alimentación al PC portátil. En la mayoría de los casos la señal de salida del PC portátil no se activa a menos que esté conectado al proyector antes de ser activado. * Si la pantalla queda en blanco mientras usa el mando a distancia, es probable que se deba a la acción del protector de pantalla o a la función de ahorro de energía del ordenador. • Consulte también la página siguiente.
La imagen repentinamente se vuelve oscura
• Compruebe si el proyector se encuentra en modo ECO forzoso debido a que la temperatura ambiente es demasiado alta. Si es así, reduzca la temperatura interna del proyector seleccionando la opción [ALTO] para el [MODO DE VENTILADOR]. (→ página 61)
La tonalidad o el tinte de los colores no es normal
• Compruebe si se ha seleccionado un color apropiado en [COLOR DE PARED]. Si no es así, seleccione una opción apropiada. (→ página 55) • Ajuste la opción [TINTE] en [AJUSTE DE LA IMAGEN]. (→ página 49)
La imagen no aparece rectangular en la pantalla
• Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ángulo de éste respecto de la pantalla. (→ página 21) • Use la función Keystone para corregir la distorsión trapezoidal. (→ página 24)
La imagen se ve borrosa
• • • •
Ajuste el enfoque. (→ página 23) Mueva el proyector para mejorar el ángulo de éste respecto de la pantalla. (→ página 21) Asegúrese de que la distancia entre el proyector y la pantalla está dentro del margen de ajuste de la lente. (→ página 10) Si se enciende el proyector luego de trasladarlo desde un lugar frío a uno caluroso, puede producirse condensación en la lente. Si esto sucediera, deje el proyector reposar hasta que ya no haya condensación en la lente.
Movimiento rápido en la • Ajuste [MODO DE VENTILADOR] en cualquier otro modo que no sea [ALTITUD ELEVADA] al utilizar el proyector en altitudes infepantalla riores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros. Utilizar el proyector en altitudes inferiores a aproximadamente 5500 pies/1700 metros y ajustando en [ALTITUD ELEVADA] puede causar que la lámpara se sobre enfríe, provocando que la imagen se mueva rápido. Cambie [MODO DE VENTILADOR] a [AUTO]. (→ página 61) La imagen se desplaza verti- • Compruebe la resolución y la frecuencia del ordenador. Asegúrese de que la resolución que esté intentando visualizar sea compatible calmente, horizontalmente o con el proyector. (→ página 80) en ambas direcciones • Ajuste la imagen del ordenador manualmente utilizando la opción Horizontal/Vertical de [OPCIONES DE IMAGEN]. (→ página 52) Instale pilas nuevas. (→ página 8) Compruebe que no hay obstáculos entre usted y el proyector. Párese a una distancia de máximo 22 pies (7 m) del proyector. (→ página 8) Asegúrese de que el ID del mando a distancia coincide con el ID del proyector. (→ página 60)
El mando a distancia no funciona
• • • •
El indicador está encendido o parpadea
• Vea el indicador de POWER/STATUS/LAMP. (→ página 73)
Los colores se mezclan en el modo RGB
• Pulse el botón AUTO ADJ. en el proyector o en el mando a distancia. (→ página 26) • Ajuste la imagen del ordenador de forma manual a través de las opciones [RELOJ]/[FASE] en las [OPCIONES DE IMAGEN] del menú. (→ página 51)
El control de LAN no está activado o el control de PC no está activado
• Asegúrese de que [TERMINAL CONTROL] esté ajustado correctamente. (→ página 64)
No puede controlar el proyector desde un equipo externo
• Compruebe si [MODO DE ESPERA] está ajustado en [AHORRO DE ENERGÍA] y si es el caso intente ajustarlo en [NORMAL]. (→ página 63)
La imagen en 3D no es visualizada
• Consulte "Detección de fallos al visualizar imágenes en 3D " en la página 42.
Si desea mayor información, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor.
S-13
Si no hay imagen o si la imagen no se visualiza correctamente. •
Proceso de conexión de la alimentación para el proyector y el PC. Asegúrese de conectar el proyector y el PC portátil mientras que el proyector se encuentre en el modo de espera y antes de activar la alimentación al PC portátil. En la mayoría de los casos la señal de salida del PC portátil no se activa a menos que esté conectado al proyector antes de ser activado. NOTA: Puede comprobar la frecuencia horizontal de la señal actual en el menú del proyector, bajo la opción Información. Si la lectura de frecuencia es “0kHz”, significará que el ordenador no está emitiendo ninguna señal. Consulte la página 67 (Manual del usuario) o vaya al paso siguiente.
•
Habilitación del modo de visualización externa en el ordenador La visualización de una imagen en la pantalla del PC portátil no significa necesariamente que el ordenador está enviando una señal al proyector. Al utilizar un ordenador portátil compatible con PC, el modo de visualización externa puede habilitarse/inhabilitarse con una combinación de teclas de función. Generalmente, la pulsación de la tecla “Fn” junto con una de las 12 teclas de función permite activar o desactivar el modo de visualización externa. Por ejemplo, en los ordenadores portátiles NEC se utiliza la combinación de teclas Fn + F3 (en los ordenadores portátiles Dell se utiliza Fn + F8) para alternar entre las opciones de visualización externa.
•
Emisión de una señal no estándar desde el ordenador Si la señal de salida de un PC portátil no cumple con las normas de la industria, la imagen proyectada no se visualizará correctamente. Si esto sucediera, desactive la pantalla LCD del PC portátil cuando utilice el proyector. La forma de desactivar/activar la pantalla LCD varía en cada PC portátil (según se describió en el paso anterior). Para obtener información detallada, consulte la documentación suministrada con el ordenador.
•
Se visualiza una imagen incorrecta al utilizar un ordenador Macintosh Si utiliza un ordenador Macintosh con el proyector, ajuste el interruptor DIP del adaptador Mac (no suministrado con el proyector) de acuerdo con la resolución del ordenador. Después de realizar el ajuste, reinicie el ordenador Macintosh para que los cambios se hagan efectivos. Si se selecciona un modo de visualización distinto de los admitidos por el ordenador Macintosh y el proyector y se cambia la posición del interruptor DIP del adaptador Mac, podrá producirse una ligera inestabilidad en la imagen o ésta podrá no visualizarse. Si esto sucediera, ajuste el interruptor DIP al modo fijo de 13” y reinicie el ordenador Macintosh. Luego, ajuste los interruptores DIP a un modo que permita la visualización y vuelva a reiniciar el ordenador Macintosh. NOTA: En el caso de un ordenador PowerBook que no tiene un conector mini D-Sub de 15 contactos, se necesita un cable adaptador de vídeo fabricado por Apple Computer.
•
Función “espejo” en un ordenador PowerBook * Al utilizar el proyector con un ordenador PowerBook de Macintosh, es posible que la salida no se ajuste a 1024 x 768 a menos que la opción “espejo” esté desactivada en el ordenador PowerBook. Para más detalles sobre la función “espejo”, consulte el manual de uso suministrado con el ordenador Macintosh.
•
Las carpetas o iconos están ocultos en la pantalla del ordenador Macintosh Las carpetas o iconos pueden no visualizarse en la pantalla. Si esto sucediera, seleccione [View] → [Arrange] en el menú Apple y organice los iconos.
S-14
Troubleshooting Check List Before contacting your dealer or service personnel, check the following list to be sure repairs are needed also by referring to the “Troubleshooting” section in your user’s manual. This checklist below will help us solve your problem more efficiently.
Voir pages 82 et 83 (Mode d’emploi) Consulte la página 82 y 83 (Manual del usuario)
Frequency of occurrence 䡺 always 䡺 sometimes (How often?_____________________)
䡺 other (__________________)
Power No power (POWER indicator does not light green) See also “Status Indicator (STATUS)”. Power cable’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet. Lamp cover is installed correctly. Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after lamp replacement. No power even though you press and hold the POWER button for 1 second.
Shut down during operation. Power cable’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet. Lamp cover is installed correctly . [AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO POWER OFF] function). [OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER] function).
Video and Audio No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the projector. Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC first, then start the PC. Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector. • A combination of function keys will enable/disable the external display. Usually, the combination of the “Fn” key along with one of the 12 function keys turns the external display on or off. No image (blue or black background, no display). Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJ. button. Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu. Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connector A message appears on the screen. ( _____________________________________________ ) The source connected to the projector is active and available. Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast. Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector. Image is too dark. Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast. Image is distorted. Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment).
Parts of the image are lost. Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ. button. Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu. Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction. Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal. Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector. Some pixels are lost. Image is flickering. Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJ. button. Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu. Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal. Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from [HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO]. Image appears blurry or out of focus. Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution. Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus. No sound. Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the projector. Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level. AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models with the AUDIO OUT connector).
Other Remote control does not work. No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control. Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls. Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation.
Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function) [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in the menu. Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button for a minimum of 10 seconds.
In the space below please describe your problem in detail.
Information on application and environment where your projector is used Installation environment
Projector Model number:
Screen size:
Serial No.:
Screen type:
䡺 Wide angle 䡺 High contrast
Date of purchase:
Throw distance:
Lamp operating time (hours): Eco Mode:
inch 䡺 White matte 䡺 Beads 䡺 Polarization
Orientation:
䡺 Off 䡺 On
feet/inch/m
䡺 Ceiling mount 䡺 Desktop
Power outlet connection:
Information on input signal: Horizontal synch frequency [
] kHz
䡺 Connected directly to wall outlet
Vertical synch frequency
[
] Hz
Synch polarity
H 䡺 (+) 䡺 (−)
䡺 Connected to power cord extender or other (the number of connected equipment______________)
V 䡺 (+) 䡺 (−) Synch type
䡺 Separate 䡺 Composite
䡺 Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number of connected equipment______________)
䡺 Sync on Green Computer
STATUS Indicator: Steady light
䡺 Orange 䡺 Green
Manufacturer:
Flashing light
[
Model number:
] cycles
Remote control model number:
Notebook PC 䡺 / Desktop 䡺 Native resolution: Refresh rate: Video adapter:
Projector
Other:
PC
DVD player
Video equipment
Signal cable
VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other
NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable? Model number: Distribution amplifier Model number:
Length:
inch/m
Manufacturer: Model number:
Switcher Model number: Adapter Model number:
Ver.3 04/10 (S)
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. U.S.Responsible Party: Address: Tel. No.:
NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100 Itasca, Illinois 60143 1-800-NEC-INFO
Type of Product: Equipment Classification: Model:
Projector Class B Peripheral NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110
We hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the technical standards as specified in the FCC Rules.
In Europe NEC Display Solutions Europe GmbH Address: Landshuter Allee 12-14 D-80637 München, Germany Telephone: +49 89 99699 0 Email:
[email protected]
In Oceania Australia AWA Limited. Address: 151 Arthur Street Homebush West NSW 2140 Australia Customer Call Centre Telephone: 0297647777 Email Address:
[email protected] For Travel Care service, while customer is in Australia, the customer will contact AWA on 1300366144, select Option 4. If you want to book warranty service by email customer goes to:
[email protected]. New Zealand Visual Group Ltd. Address: 28 Walls Road Penrose Auckland New Zealand Telephone: 095250740 Email Address:
[email protected]
© NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010
NEC Solutions (China) Co.,Ltd. Address: Rm 1903, Shining Building,35 Xueyuan Rd, Haidian District Beijing 100083, P.R.C. Telephone: +8610 82317788 NEC Hong Kong Ltd. Address: 25/F.,The Metropolis Tower,10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong Telephone: +852 2369 0335 NEC Taiwan Ltd. Address: 7F, No.167, SEC.2, Nan King East Road, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Telephone: +886 2 8500 1700 NEC Asia Pte. Ltd. Address: 401 Commonwealth Drive, #07-02, Haw Par Technocentre, Singapore 149598 Telephone: +65 6 273 8333 NEC Corporation of Malaysia Sdn. Bhd. Address: 33rd Floor, Menara TA One, 22, Jalan P. Ramlee, 50250 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia Telephone: +6 03 2178 3600 (ISDN)
Printed in China 7N8N0752
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 Portable Projector Important Information
In North America NEC Display Solutions of America, Inc. Address: 500 Park Boulevard, Suite 1100 Itasca, Illinois 60143, U.S.A. Telephone: +1 800 836 0655
In Asia NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. Address: 686-1, Nishioi, Oi-Machi, Ashigarakami-Gun, Kanagawa 258-0017, Japan Telephone: +81 465 85 2369
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 Quick Setup Guide
Connect your computer to the projector.
NP216 COMPUTER 1 IN
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 COMPUTER IN
Schließen Sie ihren Computer an den Projektor an. Connecter l’ordinateur au projecteur. Collegate il vostro computer al proiettore. Conectar el ordenador al proyector. Ligue o seu computador ao projector. Anslut din dator till projektorn. Подключите компьютер к проектору.
컴퓨터를 프로젝터에 연결하십시오 .
VGA signal cable (supplied) VGA-Signalkabel (Lieferumfang) Câble de signal VGA (fourni) Cavo dei segnali VGA (in dotazione) Cable de señal VGA (suministrado) Cabo do sinal VGA (fornecido) VGA-signalkabel (medföljer) Кабель сигнала VGA (входит в комплект поставки) VGA 시그널 케이블 ( 동봉 )
Connect the supplied power cable. Schließen Sie das mitgelieferte Netzkabel an. Connecter le câble d'alimentation fourni. Collegate il cavo d'alimentazione in dotazione. Conecte el cable de alimentación suministrado. Ligue o cabo da alimentação fornecido. Anslut den medlevererade nätkabeln. Подсоедините силовой кабель, входящий в комплект поставки.
전원 케이블을 연결하십시오 .
Remove the lens cap. Nehmen Sie die Linsenkappe ab. Retirer le cache-objectif. Rimuovete il copriobiettivo. Quite la tapa de la lente. Retire a tampa da lente. Ta bort linsskyddet. Снимите крышку объектива. 렌즈 캡을 벗기십시오 .
Turn on the projector. Schalten Sie den Projektor ein. Allumer le projecteur. Accensione del proiettore. Encienda el proyector. Ligue o projector. Slå på strömmen till projektorn. Включите питание проектора. 프로젝터를 켜십시오 .
Select a source. Auswählen einer Quelle. Sélectionner une source. Selezione di una fonte. Selección de una fuente. Escolha uma fonte. Välja en källa. Выберите источник.
입력원 선택하십시오 .
＋
TIP: Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer image automatically. TIPP: Tast AUTO ADJ. betätigen, um das Computerbild automatisch einzustellen. ASTUCE: ＋
Appuyez sur la touche AUTO ADJ pour optimiser une image d’ordinateur automatiquement. SUGGERIMENTO:
Premete il tasto AUTO ADJ. per ottimizzare automaticamente l’immagine del computer. SUGERENCIA: Pulse el botón AUTO ADJ. para optimizar automáticamente una imagen de ordenador. DICA: Prima o botão AUTO ADJ. para optimizar automaticamente uma imagem do computador. TIPS: Tryck på AUTO ADJ.-tangenten för att optimera en datorbild automatiskt. СОВЕТ: Для выполнения автоматической оптимизации компьютерного изображения нажмите кнопку AUTO ADJ. 팁: 자동 조정(AUTO ADJ.) 버튼을 누르면 컴퓨터 영상이 자동으로 최적화됩니다.
Fn
F1
F12
(→ page 12, 75 of the User’s Manual)
Ventilation (outlet) Lüftungsschlitze (Auslass) Ventilation (sortie) Ventilazione (uscita) Ventilación (salida) Ventilação (saída) Ventilation (utlopp) Вентиляционное отверстие 환기구 ( 출구 )
Adjust the picture size and position. Einstellung der Bildgröße und Bildposition. Ajuster la taille et de la position de l’image. Regolate delle dimensioni e della posizione dell’immagine.
1
Ajuste del tamaño y la posición de la imagen. Ajuste o tamanho da imagem e a posição. Justera bildstorlek och position. Настройте размер и положение изображения.
영상 크기와 위치를 조정하십시오 .
Adjustable Tilt Foot Einstellbarer Kippfuß Pied à inclinaison réglable Piedino di inclinazione regolabile Pata de inclinación ajustable Pé de inclinação ajustável Justerfot Ножка для регулирования наклона 조절식 기울임 받침
2
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever Einstellbarer Kippfußhebel Levier de pied à inclinaison réglable Leva piedino di regolazione Palanca de la pata de inclinación ajustable Alavanca ajustável do pé de inclinação Justerbar spak för justerfot Рычаг ножки для регулирования наклона 조정 가능한 기울기 받침 레버
Adjust the tilt foot Einstellung des Kippfußes Régler le pied de réglage de l’inclinaison
3
Regolate il piedino d’inclinazione Ajuste de las patas de inclinación Ajuste o Pé de Inclinação Justera lutningen med foten Настройка ножки для регулировки наклона 기울기 받침을 조절하십시오 . (→ Page 22 of the User’s Manual)
Rear foot Hinterer Fuß Pied arrière Piedino posteriore Pata posterior Pé traseiro Bakre fot Задняя ножка 뒷발
Up Nach oben Haut Su Arriba Cima Upp Вверх 위로
Down Nach Unten Bas Giù Abajo Baixo Ner Вниз 아래로
Zoom
(→ page 23 of the User’s Manual) Focus Fokus Mise au point optique Fuoco Enfoque Focagem Fokus Фокус 초점 (→ page 23 of the User’s Manual)
Correcting Keystone Distortion [KEYSTONE] Korrigieren der Trapezverzerrung [TRAPEZ] Correction de la déformation trapézoïdale [KEYSTONE] Correzione della deformazione trapezoidale [TRAPEZIO] Corrección de la distorsión trapezoidal [KEYSTONE] Corrigir a Distorção do Trapezóide [TRAPEZÓIDE] Korrigera den keystonedistorsionen [KEYSTONE] Коррекция трапециевидного искажения [ОСНОВНОЙ ПРИНЦИП] 키스톤 일그러짐 바로잡기 [ 키스톤 ] (→ page 24 of the User’s Manual)
1
Turn off the projector. Schalten Sie den Projektor aus. Eteignez le projecteur. Spegnete il proiettore.
＋
Desactive el proyector. Desligue o projector. Stäng av projektorn. Отключите питание проектора. 프로젝터를 끄십시오 .
2
Unplug the power cable. Trennen Sie das Netzkabel ab. Déconnectez le câble d’alimentation. Scollegate il cavo di alimentazione. Desenchufe el cable de alimentación. Desligue o cabo da alimentação. Dra ut nätkabeln. Отсоедините силовой кабель.
전원케이블을 빼십시오 . (→ page 27 of the User's Manual)
7N8N0731 Printed in China ©NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010 Ver. 2 02/10 (S)
NP216/NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 Quick Setup Guide NP216 Connect your computer to the projector.
COMPUTER 1 IN
NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 COMPUTER IN
Připojte počítač k projektoru. Slut computeren til projektoren. Συνδέστε τον υπολογιστή σας στον προβολέα. Kytke tietokone projektoriin. Csatlakoztassa a számítógépet a projektorhoz. Sluit uw computer aan op de projector. Koble datamaskinen til projektoren. Podłącz komputer do projektora. Bilgisayarınızı projektöre bağlayın.
Connect the supplied power cable.
Připojte dodaný napájecí kabel. Tilslut det medfølgende strømkabel. Συνδέστε το παρεχόμενο καλώδιο ρεύματος. Kytke mukana toimitettu virtajohto. Csatlakoztassa a mellékelt tápkábelt. De meegeleverde voedingskabel aansluiten. Koble til strømkabelen som følger med. Podłącz dostarczony przewód zasilający. Sağlanan güç kablosunu takın.
VGA signal cable (supplied) Signální kabel VGA (dodaný) VGA-kabel (medfølger) Καλώδιο σήματος VGA (παρέχεται) VGA-signaalikaapeli (vakiovaruste) VGA jelkábel (tartozék) VGA-signaalkabel (meegeleverd) VGA-signalkabel (inkludert) Przewód sygnałowy VGA (w zestawie) VGA sinyal kablosu (sağlanmıştır)
Remove the lens cap. Sejměte krytku objektivu. Fjern objektivdækslet. Αφαιρέστε το κάλυμμα του φακού. Poista linssinsuojus. Vegye le a lencsevédő kupakot. Verwijder de lenskap. Ta av linsedekselet. Zdejmij osłonę obiektywu. Lens kapağını çıkartın.
Turn on the projector. Zapněte projektor. Tænd projektoren. Θέστε σε λειτουργία τον προβολέα. Kytke projektoriin virta. Kapcsolja be a projektort. Schakel de projector in. Slå projektoren på. Włącz projektor. Projektörü açın.
Select a source. Vyberte zdroj. Vælg en kilde. Επιλέξτε μία πηγή. Valitse lähde. Válasszon ki egy forrást. Selecteer een bron. Velg en signalkilde. Wybierz źródło sygnału. Bir kaynak seçin.
TIP: Press the AUTO ADJ. button to optimize a computer image automatically.
TIP: Stisknutím tlačítka AUTO ADJ. (Automatické seřízení) automaticky optimalizujte obraz počítače. TIP: Tryk på knappen AUTO ADJ. for at optimere computerens billede automatisk. ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΗ: Πατήστε το πλήκτρο AUTO ADJ. (ΑΥΤΟΜΑΤΗ ΡΥΘΜΙΣΗ) για να βελτιωθεί αυτόματα η εικόνα του υπολογιστή. VINKKI: Voit optimoida tietokoneen kuvan automaattisesti AUTO ADJ. -painikkeella. TIPP: Nyomja meg az AUTO ADJ. gombot a számítógép képének automatikus optimalizálásához. TIP: Druk op de knop AUTO ADJ. om een computerbeeld automatisch te optimaliseren. TIPS: Trykk på AUTO ADJ.-knappen for å optimalisere et datamaskinbilde automatisk. WSKAZÓWKA: Naciśnij przycisk AUTO ADJ. (Automatyczne dostosowanie), aby automatyzcznie zoptymalizować obraz z komputera. İPUCU: Bilgisayar görüntüsünü otomatik olarak optimize etmek için AUTO ADJ. (OTOMATİK AYAR) düğmesine basın.
Fn
F1
F12
(→ page 12, 75 of the User’s Manual)
Ventilation (outlet) Ventilace (výstup) Ventilatie (stopcontact) Εξαερισμός (οπή) Ilmanvaihto (poistoaukko) Szellőzés (csatlakozó) Ventilation (udtag) Ventilasjon (utløp) Wentylacja (wyjście) Havalandırma (çıkış)
Adjust the picture size and position. Upravte velikost a polohu obrazu. Juster billedets størrelse og position. Ρυθμίστε το μέγεθος και τη θέση της εικόνας. Säädä kuvan kokoa ja sijantia.
1
Állítsa be a kép méretét és helyzetét. Het beeldformaat en de positie van het beeld aanpassen. Still inn bildestørrelsen og plasseringen. Wyreguluj wielkośc obrazu i jego położenie.
Adjustable Tilt Foot 2
Resim boyutunu ve pozisyonunu ayarlayın.
Nastavitelný náklon podstavce Aanpasbare kantelvoet Ρυθμιζόμενο πόδι με δυνατότητα κλίσης Säädettävä kääntöjalka Állítható dőlésszögű lábazat Justerbar drejefod Regulerbar vippefot Stopka regulacji nachylenia z możliwością dostosowania Ayarlanabilir Eğim Ayağı
Adjustable Tilt Foot Lever Nastavitelná páčka náklonu podstavce Aanpasbare regelaar voor kantelvoet Μοχλός ρύθμισης ποδιού με δυνατότητα κλίσης Säädettävän kääntöjalan vipu Az állítható dőlésszögű lábazat beállítókarja Håndtag til justerbar drejefod Spak for regulerbar vippefot Dźwignia stopki regulacji nachylenia z możliwością dostosowania Ayarlanabilir Eğim Ayak Kolu
Adjust the tilt foot Upravte podstavec pro naklonění Juster den vipbare fod
3
Ρυθμίστε το πόδι με δυνατότητα κλίσης Säädä säätöjalkaa Állítsa be a dönthető lábazatot De kantelvoet aanpassen Still inn vippefoten Dostosuj stopkę regulacji nachylenia
Rear Foot
Eğim ayağını ayarlayın
Zadní podstavec Achterste voet Πίσω πόδι Takajalka Hátsó láb Bagerste fod Bakre fot Stopka tylna Arka ayak
(→ Page 22 of the User’s Manual)
Up Nahoru Omhoog Πάνω Ylöspäin Fel Op Opp Góra Yukarı
Down Dolů Omlaag Κάτω Alaspäin Le Ned Ned Dół Aşağı
Zoom Měřítko Zoomen Ζουμ Zoomaus Nagyítás/Kicsinyítés Zoom Zoom Powiększenie Zoom (→ page 23 of the User’s Manual) Focus Zaostření Fokus Εστίαση Tarkennus Fókusz Focus Fokuser Ostrość Netleme (→ page 23 of the User’s Manual)
Correcting Keystone Distortion [KEYSTONE] Oprava lichoběžníkového zkreslení [TRAPÉZ] Korrigering af trapezforvrængning [TRAPEZ] Διόρθωση της τραπεζοειδούς παραμόρφωσης [ΒΑΣΙΚΗ ΓΡΑΜΜΗ] Trapetsivääristymän korjaaminen [KEYSTONE] A trapéz alakú deformáció korrekciója [TRAPÉZTORZÍTÁS] De keystonevervorming corrigeren [TRAPEZIUM] Korriger trapesformen [KEYSTONE] Regulacja zniekształcenia trapezowego opcja [ZNIEKSZTAŁC. TRAPEZ.] Trapez Distorsiyonunu Düzeltme [KİLİTTASİ] (→ page 24 of the User’s Manual)
1
Turn off the projector. Vypněte projektor. Sluk projektoren. Θέστε εκτός λειτουργίας τον προβολέα. Katkaise projektorin virta. Kapcsolja ki a projektort. Schakel de projector uit. Slå projektoren av. Wyłącz projektor. Projektörü kapatın.
2
Unplug the power cable. Odpojte napájecí kabel. Træk strømstikket ud. Αποσυνδέστε το καλώδιο ρεύματος. Irrota virtajohto. Húzza ki a tápkábelt. Koppel de voedingskabel los. Trekk ut strømkabelen. Odłącz przewód zasilający. Güç kablosunu çıkartın. (→ page 27 of the User’s Manual)
7N8N0741 Printed in China ©NEC Display Solutions, Ltd. 2009 - 2010 Ver. 2 02/10 (S)
Cautions for Maintenance Services 1. How to start the set under the condition that the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are removed The Lamp Cover switch (COVER PWB ASSY) of this model is mounted on the top of the Power Case. The set cannot be started if the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are left removed. This is because the Lamp Cover switch can be turned OFF only if the LAMP COVER ASSY is removed. Follow the steps shown below when intending to start up the set under the condition that the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY are removed. 1 Provide for carton (or cardboard paper) Length: 30 ~ 40 (mm), Depth: 50 ~ 60 (mm), Thickness: 2 ~ 3 (mm)
2 Insert the carton (or cardboard paper) in the right side of the Lamp Cover switch. (Insert it along the Lamp Cover switch.)
ON by PUSH
LAMP COVER SWITCH
Insert the carton Insert it in the red frame section.
Caution: Under the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY and LAMP COVER ASSY are removed, the set can be started by the method described above. However, the set cannot be started under the condition that the TOP COVER ASSY only is mounted and the LAMP COVER ASSY is removed.
2. Cautions for the installation of LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY When installing the LAMP COVER ASSY and TOP COVER ASSY on the set, the TOP COVER ASSY only should be mounted first. Then, the LAMP COVER ASSY can be mounted. If the installation work is carried out in the state that the LAMP COVER ASSY is mounted on the TOP COVER ASSY, the Lamp Cover switch may be damaged by the embossed part of the LAMP COVER ASSY.
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Operational checks
A certain degree of fault can be analyzed by simply checking the operating conditions of ordinary use. Before removing the top cover, check the POWER indicator and the STATUS indicator. • Is the POWER indicator lit in orange in the standby state?
No Yes
• The power cord is wrongly connected. • The connector (POPA) is unplugged. • The power unit is faulty. (VCCS+6.5V and VCCS+15V not supplied) • The peripheral circuits of the MAIN PWB DDP2230 are faulty. • The peripheral circuits of the SUB CPU (IC2606) are faulty. • Fuses (F2601/F2602) are broken.
• Is the STATUS indicator blinking in red in the standby state?
Yes [Blinking once every 3 seconds] • The lamp cover is dislodged. • The connector (POLB) is unplugged. [Blinking twice every 4 seconds] • The inner temperature is unusual, deviating from the range of normal ambient temperature conditions. • The connector (POBM) is unplugged. [Blinking 4 times every 6 seconds] • The fan is faulty. Otherwise, the fan rotation is blocked by intrusion of foreign substances. • The connector (POFA/FB) is unplugged. [Blinking 6 times every 8 seconds] • The lamp fails to light. No • The connector (PODC/PODB/POCW/LAMP) is unplugged.
• Is the LAMP indicator lit in red in the standby state?
Yes
• Lamp’s life has expired. The permissible extension time for replacement has been exceeded. Starting is impossible. No ⇒ Replace the lamp.
• Is the LAMP indicator blinking in red in the state of STANDBY and POWER ON?
Yes [Blinking once per second] • Lamp’s life has expired. Between lamp’s life and the permissible extension time for replacement (100H). No ⇒ Replace the lamp.
• When the power is ON, does the power indicator blink in green for one minute? Is it lit in green since then?
No Yes
• The MAIN PWB is faulty. • Destruction of program or data.
• Normal in regard to starting and operation.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Power block
Problems in the power-related circuits will cause various kinds of malfunction, such as no presentation of pictures, no lamp lighting, failure in fan rotation, and others. In case of any malfunction, examine whether the present phenomenon really comes from a fault in the power circuit and check the power block. • Check whether the voltage outputs specified below are available at the POPA and PODC connectors of the MAIN PWB. POPA PIN No.
Signal name
Standby
Power ON
Related circuits
1
S6.5V
+6.5V
+6.5V
SUB-CPU, video input
2
GND
GND
GND
GND
3
S15
+15V
+15V
Fan driver, CPU, video processor, audio
4
S15
+15V
+15V
Fan driver, CPU, video processor, audio
5
GND
GND
GND
GND
6
GND
GND
GND
GND
7
PFC-ON
0V
+3.3V
Standby power consumption control
PIN No.
Signal name
Standby
Power ON
Related circuits
1
RxD/LAMP_FLG
+3.3V
0V
UART_RxD signal/Detection of lamp’sunlighting
PODC
2
GND
GND
GND
GND
3
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
–
4
LAMP_EN
+3.3V
+3.3V
Lamp’s lighting control
5
TxD/LAMP_PW
+3.3V
+3.3V/+1.5V
UART_RxD signal/Lamp power control
If there is no voltage output at the POPA/PODC connector, check the power block following the steps shown below.
• Is F2601 and F2602 (fuse) blown out in the Power Supply PWB?
Yes No
•Is there an input (100~400V) available at both ends of R2612 in the board?
No Yes
The DC power block is faulty.
• When the power is ON and the PODC (Pin 4) LAMP_EN is low, is the PODC (Pin 1) LAMP_FLG maintained at the low level?
No Yes
Replace the fuse.
The BALLAST PWB is faulty. Otherwise, the connector (5-pin) is pulled out in the board.
• Any circuit other than the Power Supply and BALLAST PWB is faulty. (Lamp broken)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. I/O, Sync, and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) 3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input)
1 Are there any digital signal output at 52~58Pins, 60~61Pins, 82~85Pins, 87~91Pins of IC1203?
Yes No
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?
Yes No
Go to 5.
3 Is the signal available at both ends of FB1202 (CV signal)?
Yes No
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
4 Is the signal available at both ends of JL1201 (CV signal)?
Yes No
Check Terminal M1202 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals for external video output equipment.
5 Are the signals available at both ends of FB1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and FB1204 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes No
6 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and JL1205 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes No
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again
Check Terminal M1201 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals for external video output equipment.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING 3-2. No presentation of RGB / COMPONENT images (For video system / D-SUB input)
1 Is there a digital signal output at Pins 2~9, Pins 12~19, and Pins 70~77 of IC1008?
Yes No
2 Are the signals available at both ends of R1060 (Rch), R1058 (Gch), and R1057 (Bch)?
Yes No
Check the Buffer circuit.
4 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1011 (Rch), JL1012 (Gch), and JL1013 (Bch)?
Yes No
Check IC1008 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
3 Are the signals available at both ends of C1033 (Rch), C1031 (Gch), and C1030 (Bch)?
Yes No
Check IC1401 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
Check Terminal M1001 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals for external video output equipment.
3-3. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input)
1 Is the horizontal sync signal available at both ends of R1268?
No Yes
2 Is the vertical sync signal available at both ends of R1267?
No Yes
Go to 3 of 3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input).
Go to 3 of 3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input).
• Check IC1401 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
3-4. No presentation of video images (For video system/D-Sub input)
1 Are the signals available at both ends of R1039 (horizontal sync signal) and R1067 (vertical sync signal)?
Yes No
2 Are the signals available at both ends of R1053 (horizontal sync signal) and R1078 (vertical sync signal)?
Yes No
Check IC1008 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
Check Terminal M1001 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals for external video output equipment. “Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. I/O, Sync, and ADC blocks (Applicable to NP216) 3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input)
1 Are there any digital signal output at 52~58Pins, 60~61Pins, 82~85Pins, 87~91Pins of IC1206?
Yes No
2 Is the input signal for S-VIDEO?
Yes No
Go to 5.
3 Is the signal available at both ends of FB1202 (CV signal)?
Yes No
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
4 Is the signal available at both ends of JL1201 (CV signal)?
Yes No
Check Terminal M1203 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals for external video output equipment.
5 Are the signals available at both ends of FB1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and FB1204 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes No
6 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1203 (SV BRIGHT signal) and JL1205 (SV COLOR signal)?
Yes No
Check IC1206 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again
Check Terminal M1203 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals for external video output equipment.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING 3-2. No presentation of RGB / COMPONENT images (For video system / D-SUB input) 3-2-1. For COMPUTER_1 input
1 Is there a digital signal output at Pins 2~9, Pins 12~19, and Pins 70~77 of IC1008?
Yes No
2 Are the signals available at both ends of R1060 (Rch), R1058 (Gch), and R1057 (Bch)?
Yes No
Check IC1008 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
3 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1011 (Rch), JL1012 (Gch), and JL1013 (Bch)?
Yes No
Check IC1401 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
Check Terminal M1001 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals for external video output equipment.
3-2-2. For COMPUTER_2 input
1 Is there a digital signal output at Pins 2~9, Pins 12~19, and Pins 70~77 of IC1008?
Yes No
2 Are the signals available at both ends of R1060 (Rch), R1058 (Gch), and R1057 (Bch)?
Yes No
Check IC1008 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
3 Are the signals available at both ends of JL1041 (Rch), JL1042 (Gch), and JL1043 (Bch)?
Yes No
Check IC1401 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
Check Terminal M1003 or its peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals for external video output equipment.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-6
TROUBLESHOOTING 3-3. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input)
1 Is the horizontal sync signal available at both ends of R1268?
No Yes
2 Is the vertical sync signal available at both ends of R1267?
No Yes
Go to 3 of 3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input).
Go to 3 of 3-1. No presentation of video images (For video system/CV input).
• Check IC1401 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
3-4. No presentation of video images (For video system/D-Sub input) 3-4-1. For COMPUTER_1 input
1 Are the signals available at both ends of R1039 (horizontal sync signal) and R1067 (vertical sync signal)?
Yes No
2 Are the signals available at both ends of R1001 (horizontal sync signal) and R1007 (vertical sync signal)?
Yes No
Check IC1008 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
Check the peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals at Terminal M1001 or external video output equipment.
3-4-2. For COMPUTER_2 input
1 Are the signals available at both ends of R1039 (horizontal sync signal) and R1067 (vertical sync signal)?
Yes No
2 Are the signals available at both ends of R1109 (horizontal sync signal) and R1110 (vertical sync signal)?
Yes No
Check IC1008 or its peripheral circuits. Data rewriting again.
Check the peripheral circuits. Installations are no good.
• Check the signals at Terminal M1003 or external video output equipment.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. DMD Driver block 4-1. Picture errors 4-1-1. [Symptom] No pictures presented
• Are the connector to POF01/ POCW / PODB?
No Yes
• Are the following signals input in the state of MAIN PWB Power ON? Is the logic of SYSRSTZ, LAMPEN, and POWERGOOD correct?
POWERGOOD SYSRSTZ LAMPEN
No Yes
(Normal: Hi) (Normal: Hi) (Normal: Hi)
Check position: R2624 Check position: POJTAG_15Pin Check position: R2661
The MAIN PWB is faulty.
• Is a power voltage 1.2V/1.8V/3.3V input at IC1401?
No Yes
Connector connections are defective.
IC2602 is faulty.
• There is no abnormality in operation.
4-1-2. [Symptom] No pictures presented; picture error in horizontal lines
• Are the following voltages available at JL1801 / JL1802 / JL1803?
JL1801 JL1802 JL1803
No Yes
Check whether the signal level is low at Pin 6 (OE) of IC1801. If there is no problem, IC1801 is faulty. If the signal level is Hi, IC1401 is considered to be faulty.
• Are the connector connected to POF01 that is between MAIN PWB and DMD PWB?
No Yes
+23V~26V –26V +8.5V
Connector connections are defective.
• There is no problem in operation.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-8
TROUBLESHOOTING 4-1-3. [Symptom] Vertical lines in the screen
• Is the connector connected to POF01 that is between MAIN PWB and DMD PWB?
No Yes
Connector connections are defective.
• The DMD itself is considered to be faulty. Otherwise, the socket is faulty.
4-2. Color wheel error 4-2-1. [Symptom] No color wheel rotation
• Are there a +12V input available at Pin 9/22/37/42 of IC2602?
No Yes
• Is the reset terminal, Pin 48 of IC2602, maintained at Hi level?
No Yes
IC2606 is faulty.
IC1401 is faulty. IC2602 is faulty or the circuit is faulty because of poor soldering.
• It is considered to be malfunction in color wheel itself.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-9
TROUBLESHOOTING
5. Wired LAN 5-1. Wired LAN is out of order • Is RJ45 LED blinking?
NO
Is the voltage of 3.3V output at Pin 1 of POLA?
NO
YES YES
Poor connection of the PORJ (Main board side)/POLA (LAN board side) Poor mounting in peripheral circuit.
Check the peripheral circuit of IC8004, and LAN cable connection. Otherwise, poor soldering of M8001.
• After execute the reset at the RESET/NETWORK SETTINGS, is it possible to communicate through the Virtual Remote and the like?
No
Is it possible to communicate at the PING 192. 168. 0. 10?
YES
NO
Check the communication setting of PC.
Check the section between IC8004 peripheral ~ POLA and between IC8004 peripheral ~ IC1401/IC2606.
YES
• Normal in regard to operation.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Audio block (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) 6-1. [Symptom] No audio signals are generated. • Are signal waveforms available at POSP Pin 1/2?
YES
Silk covered wire of speaker broken, cable disconnection, poor contact around connectors.
NO
• Are audio signals available at IC2206 Pin 2/13? NO
YES
Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
• Are audio signals available at IC2208 Pin 11/14?
YES
Check IC2203 of its peripheral circuits.
NO
• Possibly attributable to a fault in speaker itself.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Audio block (Applicable to NP216) 6-1. [Symptom] No audio signals are generated. • Are signal waveforms available at POSP Pin 1/2?
YES
Silk covered wire of speaker broken, cable disconnection, poor contact around connectors.
NO
• Are audio signals available at IC2606 Pin 2/13? NO
YES
Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
• What is the present input selection?
Computer1 g To 1 Computer2 g To 2 VIDEO, S-VIDEO g To 3
1 Is an audio signal available at Pin 1/32 of IC2206? Are there waveforms at Pins 13 and 14?
YES
Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
NO
Check peripheral circuits around Terminal M2202 and also external audio output equipment.
2 Is an audio signal available at Pin 2/31 of IC2206? Are there waveforms at Pins 13 and 14?
YES
Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
NO
Check peripheral circuits around Terminal M2203 and also external audio output equipment.
3 Is an audio signal available at Pin 3/30 of IC2206? Are there waveforms at Pins 13 and 14?
YES
Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
NO
Check peripheral circuits around Terminal M2204 and also external audio output equipment.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-12
TROUBLESHOOTING 6-2.[Symptom] No audio output is available for external equipment. • Are audio signals available at IC2606 Pin 9/24?
NO
Check IC2206 of its peripheral circuits.
YES
• Are audio signals available at both ends of R2286 and R2287?
YES
Check the peripheral circuits.
NO
• Check the audio systems of external equipment.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
4-13
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
PC Control Software for Service 1. Outline Software Descriptions 2. Equipment to be used and Environment 3. Software Installation Procedures
3-1. Main adjustment software
4. Repair and adjustment procedures
4.1. Method of start and ending of adjustments 4-2 Replacement of the MAIN PWB 4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel 4-4. Miscellany
5. Other Functional Descriptions
5-1. Input Level 5-2. Test Paterns
6. Error Messages
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-1
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1. Outline Software Descriptions
This is the PC control software to be used for the servicing adjustments needed during the replacement of the MAIN PWB, optical engine unit (including CWC PWB and DMD chip), projector lens, of the DLP projector, NP110/115/210/215/216.
This software is applicable to the following purposes: • Color Wheel adjustment • Lamp/Projector usage time setting • Read/Write of the factory adjusting data (Color Correction, Color Wheel) and the usage time data. • Adjustment of input level (Sub-Brightness / Sub-Contrast)
2. Equipment to be used and Environment
• Software for servicing adjustments (Ser_NP215ver***.exe ***: Version Notation) • Personal computer (WindowsXP/2000/98 in operation and either of the serial ports COM1-COM9 is DSUB 9-pin) • Serial cable (D-SUB9pin-D-SUB9pin cross (reverse) cable)
• PC resolution, frequency, and No. of colors Make setting at VESA XGA (1024 x 768) 60Hz, High color (16 bits) or more. • The adjusting pattern outputs available for the personal computer are only the test patterns in the “Input Level Adjust” screen or only the test patterns in the “Color Wheel Adjust” screen. All other adjusting patterns to be used are the built-in test patterns.
3. Software Installation Procedures 3-1. Main adjustment software This software is composed of the following: • Main software for servicing adjustments (Ser_NP215Series_Ver***.exe***: Version Notation) • Various DLL files It is distributed from CD-ROM. Installation into the PC is carried out in the procedures described below.
1 Copy all the files to an arbitrary folder. These files are located in "Service Adjustment" of the furnished CD-ROM.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-2
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
4. Repair and Adjustment Procedures 4-1. Method of start and ending of adjustments
According to [2. Equipment to be used and Environment] - , assume the condition that the PJ and the PC are connected through a serial cable. In this state, start the servicing adjustment software (Ser_NP215Series_ver***.exe).
Click [Setup] to open the Setup screen and select the COM port that is connected to the PJ.
[Baud Rate] is 38,400 bps for default setting on the PJ side. Upon completion, return to the previous stage with [Return].
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-3
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
Click [Adjust Start] for model discrimination and initial data read. * When model discrimination is normally finished, various adjusting buttons in [Adjust] become available.
When adjustments of 4.2~4.4 below are finished, click [Adjust End].
Clear the data acquired with [Adjust End] so that adjustments can be carried out for another set. * When another set is adjusted subsequently, start the work with [Adjust Start]. * If adjustment of another set is attempted without performing [Adjust End], an error takes place as a result of model discrimination.
When closing the adjustment program, click the [Close] button. If [Adjust Start] has already been executed, [Close] cannot be accomplished unless [Adjust End] is carried out.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-4
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 4-2 Replacement of the MAIN PWB
The MAIN PWB can be replaced in the procedures specified below. • All Data copy
While the PJ power supply is maintained in the standby state, open the Data screen by clicking [Data] of the main screen of the servicing software.
According to the processes of (1) and (2) below, make Read / Write of All Data. All Data mentioned here denotes various Factory Adjusting Data (Color Correction, Color Wheel) and Usage Time.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-5
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS (1) All Data Read Prior to replacement, read out the Main PWB data presently used and save these data in a file. Check them in [All Data], click the [Read] button to designate the file name, and save the data.
* According to the status of failure, the data may fail to be saved. In such a case, carry out the work for [4-4. Miscellany].
(2) All Data Write After the replacement of the MAIN PWB, click the [Write] button to select the saved file and write the data in.
(3) End The main screen can be recovered with [Return]. When Data Write is carried out, the characters of [Data] become bold in the main screen.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-6
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel
To replace the optical engine unit or the color wheel, the following actions: • Color Wheel adjustments
Click [Color Wheel] of the servicing main software and open the Color Wheel Adjust screen.
Make color wheel adjustments according to (1), (2), and (3) below.
(1) Adjusting test pattern output Enter an RGB output of the personal computer and click the [Ramp WRGB] button of Test (PC Out) so that the adjusting scale pattern can be displayed.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-7
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS (2) Adjustments for the optimal value Use the scroll bar of Index Adjust and make adjustments to obtain the optimal value at which a color gap (Vertical Pattern) disappears. However in this case, adjustments shall be carried out to obtain the optimal value because there is a certain amount of width at the point where the color gap disappears. (The optimal value denotes the center value of the width at the point where the color gap disappears.) (1) When the scroll bar is moved to “0,” a color gap appears. (2) Raise the scroll bar to the level where the color gap disappears. At that time, record the value indicated. (Example: 250) (3) Go on raising the scroll bar until the color gap appears. (4) Starting from the point where the color gap appears, lower the scroll bar until the color gap disappears. (Example: 300) (5) Calculate the mean value of the recorded two values. (250+300)/2=275 (6) Adjust the scroll bar until the value of the calculation result can be secured. (Example: 275) (7) Confirm that there is no color gap in the screen.
The status when the color gap (vertical pattern) appears slightly
The status without any color gap (vertical pattern)
(3) Preservation of the adjusted value. Click the [Set] button when the optimal value has been adjusted completely. (4) End Return to the main screen with [Return]. Upon the completion of adjustments, the characters of [Color Wheel] become bold in the main screen.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-8
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 4-4. Miscellany The following adjustments are required in the case of failure in to be performed at the time of MAIN PWB replacement. • Usage Time setup • Color Wheel adjustment (*) * If the procedures 4.3 are executed, these adjustments are not required.
For Color Wheel adjustments, refer to [4.3 Replacement of the optical engine unit or the color wheel].
* If the present Lamp / Projector Usage Time is different from actual usage time, modification of time into the correct usage time can be performed only by taking the following actions: * When Read / Write of All Data is performed with [Data] at the time of MAIN PWB replacement, Lamp / Projector Usage Time is also copied correctly. Therefore, it is unnecessary to set up any time-related values. * If the correct usage time is unclear, never use it.
Click [Usage Time] of the servicing main software to open the Usage Time Setting screen.
Carry out Usage Time setting according to (1) and (2) described below.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-9
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS (1) Preliminary confirmation The adjusting set shall remain in the standby state. Select the type of changing Usage Time from [Change usage time].
(2) Setup For the lamp, set up Usage Time [Hours] and Remainder [%] by means of the scroll bar. For the projector, set up Usage Time [Hours] with the scroll bar. Click the [SET] button in the [Data] box and save the setting value in the projector. * When Usage Time is changed, the changed time is displayed in the editor located underneath. * When recovering the previous time after change, click the [RESET] button to recover the initial data. (3) End Return to the main screen with [Return]. When Usage Time is changed, the characters of [Usage Time] become bold in the main screen.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-10
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
5. Other Functional Descriptions
5-1. Input Level
Used for the adjustment of Input Level. * Since the input level of the MAIN PWB has been already adjusted, no general adjustments are required any more. Click [Input Level] of the servicing main software to open the Input Level Adjust screen. According to the procedures of (1) ~ (4) below, make adjustments of RGB / Video / Component (DVD) / Component (HDTV). (1) Adjustment of RGB Input Level (sub-brightness and sub-contrast) Select [RGB] in the Adjust Signal Box. As an adjusting signal, enter a gray scale input in the input terminal of Computer IN by the use of an RGB signal generator. Otherwise, enter an RGB output of the personal computer and display the gray scale with the [Scale] button in the Test (PC Out) Box. To avoid black chroma, high-light chroma, or coloring in the gray scale, adjust the sub-brightness and sub-contrast with the scroll bar. After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] button in the Data Box. (2) Adjustment of Video Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast) Select [Video] in the Adjust Signal Box. As an adjusting signal, enter a gray scale input from the Video signal generator. To avoid high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-contrast G (Y) with the scroll bar. After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] button in the Data Box. (3) Adjustment of Component (DVD) Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast) Select [Comp (DVD)] in the Adjust Signal Box. As adjusting signals, enter a 480i gray scale and a split color bar in the input terminal of Computer IN by the use of a Component (DVD) signal generator. To avoid high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-contrast with the split color bar. After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] in the Data Box.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-11
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS (4) Adjustment of Component (HDTV) Input Level (Sub-Brightness and Sub-Contrast) Select [Comp (HDTV)] in the Adjust Signal Box. As adjusting signals, enter a 480p, 720p, or 1080i gray scale and a split color bar in the input terminal of Computer IN by the use of a Component (HDTV) signal generator. To avoid black chroma and high-light chroma in the gray scale, adjust the sub-brightness and subcontrast with the split color bar. After the completion of adjustments, click the [Set] in the Data Box. (5) End Return to the main screen with [Return]. When Usage Time is changed, the characters of [Usage Time] become bold in the main screen. * When recovering the previous setting after adjustments, click the [RESET] button to recover the initial data. * In regard to the numerals beside the scroll bar, the value at the time of adjustment start is displayed on the left of the arrow mark and the present value on the right of the arrow mark. * The data adjusted by means of a scroll bar are temporary. These data cannot immediately be saved in the projector. Execute [SET] first, and then write the data in the E2PROM. * In all cases other than RGB signal adjustments, signals of the personal computer cannot be used.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-12
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
5-2. Test Patterns
The test patterns are used when controlling the projector from the personal computer.
At the [Power] box, data of Projector Power Supply ON/OFF are generated. At the [Input Select] box, data of the situation of Projector Input Changeover are generated. At the [Test Pattern] box, data of the various test patterns are generated.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-13
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
6. Error Messages • “TIME OUT (ACK)!” ⇒ This is a communication error arising in conjunction with the PJ. Check connections and confirm whether the PJ main power supply is turned ON. • “TIME OUT (Data)!” ⇒ This is a communication error arising in conjunction with the PJ. Check connections and confirm whether the PJ is free from any abnormality. Try it again. • “Comm Open Error” Failure in opening the serial port. Confirm if there is any application that uses the serial port or whether the serial port number is wrong. • “Comm Close Error” Failure in closing the serial port. Check whether any other application is using the serial port. • “File format error!”, “Address Error” The data format is different from that of the file specified at the time of data writing from the file. Specify the correct file. • “Comparison error!!” Failed in writing various data (data, input level, color wheel, usage time). If the error remains even after retry, this may be subject to a fault in the board. • “No Signal Input!!” This is a no-signal error possibly appearing during input level adjustments. Confirm if there is a signal input available at the selected input terminal. • “Please check the “All” or other” No check mark is attached to ìAllî or any other data while data reading is executed. Select the data to be read out. • “DATA READ ERROR!”, “DATA SEND ERROR!” This is a Read/Send error in conjunction with the buffer in the serial port. There is possibility of PC malfunction. Try to restart the PC.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-14
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
• “ACK Error!!” This is a communication error with the PJ. Check the PJ status and retry. • “Model error!!” The PJ is not the objective model (NP215s). • “Model check Error (Data Read)!!” This is a communication error with the PJ. Check connections and confirm whether the PJ is normal. Then retry. • “Model check Errror (2)!! Please begin with a start” The behavior of PJ is different from that at the time of adjustment start. When adjusting another PJ, start it with the ìAdjust Startî button.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-15
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
Model-Specific Data Writing Procedure for NP215 Series (NP216 is not applicable) 1. Model-specific data writing procedure
Writing procudures shall be performed from step 1) to step 2).
1) Writing the model-specific VerUpField data Writing software : PJUpgrader2vupf.exe File name to be written : N-np***_vupf.bin 2) Writing the model-specific product data Writing software : PJUpgrader2.exe File name to be written : np***_mdata_******.bin Note) Names of files in which the model-specific product data are written shall be as follows: For MAIN PWB ASSY P/N: 81S****, use data version "0.10.018". For MAIN PWB ASSY P/N: 81T****, use data version "2.00.035". The part numbers of the maintenance parts for the MAIN PWB ASSY (supply parts) are as specified below. (List of MAIN PWB ASSY) List of MAIN PWB ASSY Model
Product Revision
NP215 NP115
From A to C
Product Revision
NP215G/215+ NP210G/210+ NP115G/115+
From A to C
Product Revision
NP215J NP210J NP115J NP110J
Part Number
Remark
81T80FA2
As soon as the inventory is finished, the part numbers 81S31FA2 and 81S35FA2 will be switched over to 81T80FA2 that is for the supply part. (Unified to 81T80FA2 for all models)
81S31FA2 D and after or 81S35FA2
Part Number
Product Revision
Part Number
Remark
81T81FA2
As soon as the inventory is finished, the part numbers 81S32FA2 and 81S36FA2 will be switched over to 81T81FA2 that is for the supply part. (Unified to 81T81FA2 for all models)
Part Number
Remark
81T36FA3
As soon as the inventory is finished, the part numbers 81S32FA2 and 81S36FA2 will be switched over to 81S36FA3 that is for the supply part. (Unified to 81S36FA3 for all models)
81S36FA2
NP110G/110+ Model
Product Revision
81S35FA2
NP110
Model
Part Number
81S32FA2 D and after or 81S36FA2
Part Number
Product Revision
81S36FA2 From A to C
81S32FA2 D and after or 81S36FA2
3) Initial setting of writing software [COM port] : Set the COM port of used PC. [Baud rate] : 115200 bps
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-16
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 2. Operation Procedure
Prior to operation, install writing software (PJUpgrader2vupf.exe and PJUpgrader2.exe) and files for the model to be written (n-np***_vupf.bin and np***_mdata_******.bin).
1)
Model-specific VerUpField data 1 Connect PKG (set) to PC by using PC control cable. 2 Make sure that electrical power is not applied tp PKG (set). 3 With pressing both [ENTER] and [EXIT] keys, turn the power supply on. 4 Make sure that Power LED illuminates green.
5 Start up PJUpgrader2vupf.exe (
) previously installed.
The following files will be generated in the folder:
).
6 Start up PJUpgrader2vupf.exe (
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-17
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 7 Press [choose…] button to select the file to be written.(Ex: NP215) 8 Check that the set and PC are properly connected each other, then press [Flash] button. Message "Do you start flash write?" is displayed. 9 When [Yes(Y)] button is pressed, writing is started. (Progress bar showing writing situation is displayed.)
Message "Write Finished!" is displayed, when completed.Press [OK] button to finish the operation.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-18
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 2) Model-specific production data 1 Connect PKG (set) to PC by using PC control cable. 2 Make sure that electrical power is not applied tp PKG (set). 3 With pressing both [EXIT] and [MENU] keys, turn the power supply on. 4 Make sure that Power LED illuminates green.
5 Start up PJUpgrader2.exe (
) previously installed.
The following files will be generated in the folder:
6 Start up PJUpgrader2.exe (
).
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-19
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 7 Press [choose…] button to select the file to be written.(Ex: NP215 Version "0.10.018") 8 Check that the set and PC are properly connected each other, then press [Flash] button. Message "Do you start flash write?" is displayed. 9 When [Yes(Y)] button is pressed, writing is started. (Progress bar showing writing situation is displayed.)
Message "Write Finished!" is displayed, when completed.Press [OK] button to finish the operation.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-20
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 3. Error Messages 1 Header information is illegal.（-308） Check the selected file. PJUpgrader2 for vupf cannot rewrite the farm data. 2 Attestation failure.（-1001） When rewriting the version up field, it is required to set the projector in writing only mode in advance. 3 The model information of the file conflicts with that of the connected projector.（-1002） Check the projector connecting to the selected file. The projector connected is not that the selected file can write for.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-21
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS 1. Adjustment of the optical axis (Shadow adjustment) 1-1. Facilities to be used • Screwdriver for CL1 adjustment and fixing: Hexagon screwdriver (Opposite side: 2.0mm) • Screw fixing adhesive agent • PC for PC control • PC control cable (RS232C serial cable) 1-2. Shadow adjustments (Light Tunnel adjustments) 1 Using the adjusting software, project a signal (all-white screen: Test Pattern - Raster 100%) for shadow adjustments. Adjust the projection size to 50 inches or above. Set the zoom lever position to the wide end and adjust the focus.
2 Turn the adjusting screw in front of the set and adjust the shadow in the vertical direction on the projector screen. Stop the adjusting screw where the vertical radiation margin at the top and the bottom is equally balanced. (See 2 in Fig. 1 of Item 1-5.) 3 Turn the adjusting screw located behind the set through the hole for MAIN PWB adjustments and adjust the shadow in the horizontal direction on the projector screen. Stop the adjusting screw where the horizontal radiation margin at the right and the left is equally balanced. (See 3 in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 of Item 1-5.) 4 Apply an adhesive agent to the boundary sections (2 positions) of the adjusting screw and the engine base in order to fix the adjusting screw. (4 in Fig. 1 of Item 1-5)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-22
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1-3. Shadow adjustment flow Start of adjustment
Make Vertical shadow control. (1-2-2) Shadow present
Check vertical shadow.
There is a shadow vertical
No shadow Make horizontal shadow control. (1-2-3)
Check vertical and horizontal shadow.
Shadow present
There is a shadow horizontal
No shadow End of adjustment
1-4. How to handle irradiation margin in shadow adjustments Shadow adjustments shall be carried out so that the top, bottom, right, and left irradiation margins can be evenly balanced. Since all area of the radiation margins cannot be seen at a time, move the shadow upwards and downwards, and to the right and left until its one end appears. Examining the amount of margin at the top, bottom, right, and left, stop the adjusting screw when the radiation margins are equally balanced.
• Vertical shadow adjustments Turn the adjusting screw clockwise. (Shadow on the upper side)
Position where the radiation margins are equally balanced
Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise. (Shadow on the lower side)
Position where the radiation margins are equally balanced
Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise. (Shadow on the right side)
• Horizontal shadow Turn the adjusting screw clockwise. (Shadow on the left side)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-23
METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTS
1-5. Adjusting position (Screw for shadow adjustments)
2 Vertical
adjustments
4 Adhesion
3 Horizontal
adjustments
Fig. 1. LT Adjusting Block (1)
3 Horizontal
adjustments
Horizontal adjusting screw
MAIN PWB adjusting hole
Adjusting screwdriver
Fig. 1. LT Adjusting Block (2)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
5-24
SERVICEMAN MODE
NP215s Serviceman Mode 1. List of functions Mode Functions
Expert
SOURCE>TEST PATTERN
Service
X
ADJUST>PICTURE>SHARPNESS ADJUST>EXPERT SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE INFO.>USAGE TIME>PROJECTOR HOURS USED Info.>SOURCE>RESOLUTION
X
INFO.>VERSION>BIOS SETUP>VERSION-CPU SETUP>VERSION (2)>MODEL NAME/API/FAN/OSD
X
2. Mode changes 2.1. Expert mode • With the [HELP] key kept pressed, and while the Information Screen is displayed, the keys are pressed in the order specified below. [Top] -> [Left] -> [HELP] • Press the [MENU] key to display the menu, confirm that [Expert] has been displayed on the lower right of the menu screen. 2.2. Serviceman mode • When the keys are pressed for 3 seconds in the order of [HELP] → [ENTER] → [HELP] → [ENTER] → [HELP] → [ENTER] → [MENU] in the state of Power ON, a menu of "Enter Passcode" is displayed. • Press the selector keys in the order of [UP] → [RIGHT] → [LEFT] → [RIGHT] → [RIGHT] → [RIGHT] → [UP] → [UP] → [ENTER]. • Press the [MENU] key to display the menu, confirm in this state that [SERVICE] has been displayed on the lower right of the menu screen.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
6-1
SERVICEMAN MODE 2.3. How to withdraw from the mode • When the [EXIT] key is pressed in the state that no menu is displayed, the user mode can be recovered. • Return to the standby state by pressing the [POWER] key. When starting is effected again, the user mode is then recovered. 2.4. Contents of display When the Expert Mode or the Serviceman Mode is selected, the following functions are added to the menu: • Display of Information Information below is displayed, though this information is usually not displayed: For Expert mode: Information > Usage Time > (Projector Hours Used) Information >Version > (BIOS) Information >Version > (SUB-CPU) For Serviceman mode: Information >SOURCE > (RESOLUTION) Information >VERSION (2)> (MODEL NAME/API/OSD) • Addition of adjustment functions on the menu The adjustment functions are displayed though they are usually not displayed, and these adjustments become possible. For Expert mode: ADJUST > PICTURE > (SHARPNESS) ADJUST > (EXPERT) For Serviceman mode: SETUP > EXPERT > (MESSAGE) are available in the Serviceman mode.
• Modification of the processing contents of existing functions In the Serviceman mode, the items of initialize are increased in regard to Factory Default.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
6-2
SERVICEMAN MODE
3. Additional Functions
3-1. Functions to be added to the Expert Mode
3-1-1. ADJUST>PICTURE>SHARPNESS This function is used to adjust the clearness of video images. 3-1-2. ADJUST>EXPERT This function is used for the adjustment of the brightness for R, G, and B independently of each other. 3-1-3. SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE This function is used to make ON/OFF setting of messages to be displayed on the screen in the middle of projection. However, the messages specified below are displayed even though OFF has been selected. Messages to be displayed at the time of starting when a security lock is effected.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
6-3
SERVICEMAN MODE
3-2. Functions to be added to the Serviceman Mode
3-2-1. SETUP>EXPERT>MESSAGE This function is used to set up ON/OFF for the message displayed in the screen during projection. 3.2.2.
SOURCE>TEST PATTERN When the [SOURCE] key is pressed, [Test Pattern] is added to the source menu. When [TEST PATTERN] is selected, all white is displayed. When [MENU] is pressed and [TEST PATTERN] is selected from the source menu, a list of test patterns is displayed. When [Test Pattern] is selected and the [ENTER] key is pressed, the selected test pattern is displayed. For canceling, press the [MENU] key and select any source other than [Test Pattern]. Setting
Displayed pattern
Raster 100%
All-white raster
Raster 0%
All-black raster
Raster RED 100%
Red 100% raster
Raster BLUE 100%
Blue 100% raster
Raster GREEN 100% Raster BLUE 60%
Green 100% raster Blue 60% raster
Raster 30%
Brightness 30% raster
Raster 10%
Brightness 10% raster
Cross Hatch
Cross hatch
Ramp H
512-gradation horizontal ramp
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
6-4
CLEANING
Cleaning for the DMD, color wheel, light tunnel, and mirror Cautions : a) Cleaner fluid Use absolute alcohol. If the fluid does not dry out and water drops remain, replace the fluid with new absolute alcohol. b) Cleaning During the cleaning, do not touch the cleaning surface directly with the hand, or do not rub it strongly. Such careless handling may contaminate or impair the cleaning surface, and adversely affect the video images directly.
1. Cleaning of the projector lens • Method of cleaning Get clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe off contaminants by drawing a circle from the center of the lens, moving to the periphery. Cleaning Cloth (24BS7251)
2. DMD cleaning • Cleaning procedure Use clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe the DMD surface (glass surface) together with dust. Furthermore, wipe it in dry state.
3. Cleaning for the color wheel
Caution: The color wheel is made of a thin glass plate. Handle it with utmost care and never hold the glass surface directly.
• Cleaning procedure Use clean Cleaning Cloth wet with a cleaner liquid, and wipe the color wheel together with dust, from its center area to the periphery in the direction of the arrow.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
7-1
CLEANING 4. Cleaning of the light tunnel
Caution: If dirt or contaminant of a cotton swab is attached to the inner surface of the light-tunnel, such a contaminant may be transferred to the image. Therefore, the cotton swab has to be wet with a cleaner solution before use.
• Cleaning procedure Get a clean cotton swab (baby size) wet with a cleaner solution and wipe the inner surface of the lighttunnel together with contaminants.
• If contamination looks too rigorous and improvements by cleaning seem to be difficult to carry out, then it is recommended to replace the LT ASSY as a whole.
5. Cleaning of the CL3
Caution: The CL3 is made of plastic lens materials. Therefore, it can be hurt easily. Unlike other parts, cleaning by a wiping action (rubbing action) is strictly prohibited.
• Method of cleaning Use air blow or the like, often used for camera lens cleaning. The only applicable method of cleaning is the removal of contaminants by blowing them away.
6. Cleaning of other optical parts
Caution: Various optical parts are made of glass. Handle them with care. Since they can easily be hurt, do not touch them directly.
• Method of cleaning Use the cleaning cloth and remove dust along the reflecting surface of each optical part. When removing dust or contaminants accumulated around the optical parts or on the bottom of the engine assembly block (light path), use a blower that is available on general market.
7. Cleaning of other main unit For the replacement of the lamp or at the time of periodic inspection, cleaning is needed for the side surfaces of the main unit and ventilation holes. • Method of cleaning Dust and contaminants can be removed by the use of cotton applicators, a vacuum cleaner, or the like.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
7-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 1. I/O terminals (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) 1.1 Video I/O terminal
• VGA PC input (Mini D-Sub 15pin x 1 system) • VGA PC output (Mini D-Sub 15pin x 1 system) • Video input (RCA Phono terminal x 1 system) • S-Video input (S terminal x 1 system)
1.2 Audio input terminal • AUDIO IN input (Stereo•Mini jack x 1 system) 1.3 Control terminal • Service terminal (D-SUB 9pin x 1 system) 1.4 Lan terminal • RJ-45 terminal (1 system) (NP215)
1. I/O terminals (Applicable to NP216) 1.1 Video input terminal
• VGA For COMPUTER1 input (Mini D-Sub 15pin 1 system) • VGA For COMPUTER2 input (Mini D-Sub 15pin 1 system) • Video input (RCA Phono terminal 1 system) • S-Video input (S terminal 1 system)
1.2 Audio output terminal • For MONITOR output (Mini D-SUB 15pin 1 system) 1.3
Audio input terminal • For COMPUTER1 input (Stereo•Mini jack 1 system) • For COMPUTER2 input (Stereo•Mini jack 1 system) • For VIDEO input (For stereo RCA PHONO terminal and S-VIDEO in common)
1.4 Audio output terminal • COMPUTER/ VIDEO/ S-VIDEO in common (Mini jack 1 system) 1.5 Control terminal • Service terminal (D-SUB 9pin x 1 system) 1.6 Lan terminal • RJ-45 terminal (1 system)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-1
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 2. Input signals 2.1 Signal level
• RGB signal • Component signal • Video signal • S-Video signal • Sync signal
: 0.7Vp-p / 75Ω : 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal Y), 0.7Vp-p / 75Ω (Signals Cb/Cr, Pb/Pr) : 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω : 1.0Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal Y), 0.286Vp-p / 75Ω (Signal C, burst level) : TTL level (positive/negative) / 1.2kΩ
2.2 Frequencies applicable to RGB signals • Horizontal sync frequency : 15 ~ 100kHz (24kHz or above for RGB inputs) • Vertical sync frequency : 50 ~ 120Hz (The resolution over the XGA to 85Hz) • Max. resolution : UXGA + 1600dot (H) x 1200 dot (V) 2.3 Component signals The applicable component signals are as specified below. • 525i, 625i, 480p, 576p (DVD output signal) • 720p, 1080i (HDTV signal) 2.4 Video input applicable color systems The applicable color systems are as specified below. • NTSC3.58 • NTSC4.43 • PAL • PAL-M • PAL-N • PAL-60 • SECAM
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 3. Circuit Operation 3.1 Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, PLL) (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) The video signal input entered in the Mini D-SUB15. Since then, the signal is entered in the A/D converter (IC1008: AD9985A) via the buffer circuits. The video signals are converted into the 8-bit digital signals at the A/D converter and then applied to the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230). In the case of the Component signals, applied to the image processor via the A/D converter, and conversion from chroma signals to RGB signals is carried out inside the image processor. The video signals needed inside the A/D converter are clamped by the pulse signals (clamp pulse, mask pulse). These signals are generated in the A/D converter under the control of I2C. The A/D converter incorporates a PLL circuit, where the clock signals locked at the H sync signal and the timing pulses are sent to the image processor. 3.1 Input processor block (Input block, A/D converter, PLL) (Applicable to NP216) The video signal input entered in COMPUTER1 and COMPUTER2 (Mini D-SUB Pin15) is sent to the A/D converter (IC1008: AD9985A) via the RGB Selector (IC1011: EL4342IL). The video signals are converted into the 8-bit digital signals at the A/D converter and then applied to the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230). In the case of the Component signals, applied to the image processor via the A/D converter, and conversion from chroma signals to RGB signals is carried out inside the image processor. The video signals needed inside the A/D converter are clamped by the pulse signals (clamp pulse, mask pulse). These signals are generated in the A/D converter under the control of I2C. The A/D converter incorporates a PLL circuit, where the clock signals locked at the H sync signal and the timing pulses are sent to the image processor. 3.2 Sync signal processor block The H/V sync signal that was entered in the Mini D-SUB15, is applied to the A/D converter (IC1008:AD9985A) and the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) via the bus switch (IC1004). The H/V sync signal and the Sync on Green signal that were enterd in the A/D converter, are processed for sync separation of the H/V Sync output, Composite Sync, and G-Sync. Since then, the signal is entered in the image processor. Signal discrimination is carried out in the image processor. 3.3 Video signal processor block After termination, the Composite Video signal, and the S Video signal are entered in the digital video decoder (IC1206: µPD64012) through the buffer circuit. In the digital video decoder, NTSC, PAL, SECAM, and such video signals are converted and decoded into digital signals (brightness and chroma) and the resultant signals are entered in the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) together with the horizontal and vertical sync signals. The video decoder is controlled by the image processor through I2C. 3.4 Audio I/O processor (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) The audio signals are once entered in the attenuator, and then entered in the audio AMP (IC2208: TPA3007D1). The audio signal output from this AMP is generated from the internal speaker (7W max.). The audio amp is controlled by the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) through the I2C. 3.4 Audio I/O processor (Applicable to NP216) The audio signals are once entered in the attenuator, and then entered in the audio AMP (IC2208: TPA3007D1). The audio signal output from this AMP is generated from the internal speaker (7W max.). The audio amp is controlled by the image processor (IC1401:DDP2230) through the I2C. When a cable is connected to the Audio Out terminal, the internal speakers are muted and only the L/R signal output from the Audio Processor IC is available at the Audio Out terminal. When the PJ standby mode is set at NORMAL, the Audio Out output can be generated. However, in the case of Power-Saving setup, no output is available upon being transferred to the Power-Saving mode.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-3
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 3.5 Plug & Play The serial terminal of 12, 15pin of Mini D-SUB15 are connected to the EEPROM (IC1003: IS24C02D) for Plug & Play, so that the projector can be detected at the PC. 3.6 Protector If any one of the conditions below is sensed, the projector causes the status LED to blink and is restored to the standby condition. • Detection of lamp cover removal (Cycle of once) • Detection of unusual temperature by the thermal sensor and bimetal (cycle of twice) • Detection of fan (x2) stop (Cycle of 4 times) • Detection of lamp’s failure in lighting (Cycle of 6 times) 3.7
3.8
Image processor (CPU, video signal processing) The image processor (IC1401: DDP2230) is an LSI where the CPU, the video signal processor circuit, and the DLP data processor are gathered together. This processor is in charge of video signal processing, generation of DMD driver sequence signals, peripheral controls, and various controls of the projector. The programs and the data operated in the CPU are stored in the 64bit Flash ROM (IC2004: MX29LV640) and the 32kbit EEPROM (IC1402: IS24C32C). The SRAM (IC2001: IS62WV12816BLL) is used as a work memory. The RGB signals and the Component signals are fed from the A/D converter in the form of 8bit x 3 (R/ G/B or Y/Cb/Cr or Y/Pb/Pr). The video signals are fed from the video decoder in the form of 8bit x 2 (601 Y/Cb,Cr). The video output is fed to PORT1 of the image processor. The input video signals pass through the various processing sections of resolution conversion, compliance IP conversion, OSD processing, γ correction, color management, etc., and are then converted into the DMD data by format conversion, and fed to the DMD (P09701: 0.55XGA DMD) circuit. As a processing memory for format conversion and motion compliance IP conversion, the XDR (IC1604:K4Y50084) is controlled by the image processor. Based on the clock signal generated in the image processor, clock signals are fed from the clock and driver (IC1601:CDCDLP223, IC1603: CY24272ZXCT) circuit. The motor driver (IC2602: PMD1000) is in charge of color wheel control. Receiving the control signals from the DLP data processor, this circuit generates an output to the color wheel. Since the sensor output from the color wheel is fed to the image processor, synchronization can be secured. The reset IC (IC1801: DAD2000) generates outputs of DMD reset voltages and signals plus power supply voltages. When the control signals are received from the image processor, the reset voltages are established and the reset signal output is fed to the DMD. 1W power saving When [POWER SAVING] is selected in the standby mode, the normal standby mode is switched over to the power saving mode within about 10 seconds. Since power consumption is suppressed below 1W in the power saving mode, the power is fed only to the red lights of SUB-CPU (IC2606) and D2411 (Power LED). Normal start takes place when the POWER button of the remote control and the POWER key of the main unit are pressed under the power saving mode.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-4
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 3.9 Wired LAN section The LAN terminal (M8001) is used connected to the wired LAN cable. The connector is of the RJ-45 type applicable to 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX. The Ethernet signal received through the wired LAN cable is decoded at the LAN control IC: S1S60020 (IC8004). Since this IC does not have any PHY function, however, the Ethernet signals cannot be decoded directly. Consequently, signals are decoded through the Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI (IC8001). The decoded data are sent to S1S60020 (IC8004). The signals are then converted into serial signals by the LAN control IC: S1S60020 (IC8004). Therefore, operation is possible in connection with DDP2230 through the buffer IC: SN74LVC1G97DCK (IC8006). In the case of data transmission through the wired LAN cable, the command data are sent from the LAN control IC: S1S60020 (IC8004) to the Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI (IC8001). The data sent to the Ethernet PHY are modulated and then transmitted to the PC, etc., through the LAN terminal (M8001). The Ethernet PHY IC: KSZ8041NLI (IC8001) is applicable to the Auto MDI/MDI-X functions. Since it makes a connection by automatic discrimination, it is unnecessary to examine the difference between straight cable and cross cable. When PJ error occurs in the PJ or in such a case, mail transmission is still possible with the PC. 3.10 Closed Caption Speech and words used in broadcast programs are converted into the character info. The output video signals are superposed on the closed caption signals that are the character info like speech and words in broadcast programs superposed during the vertical fly-back period (vertical fly-back section of video signals in analog broadcasting) of vertical sync signals for the composite video and S-video signals. 3.11
I2C bus control operation The image processor (IC1401: DDP2230) controls the following eight devices. • I2C bus I/F 1 (BUS No. 1): Normally in operation • I2C bus I/F 2 (BUS No. 2): Operation only during Power On
(Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) Circuit symbol
Item name
IC1008
AD9985AKSTZ Z8612912SSG D64012GJ IS24C32C CDCDLP223 CY2427ZXCT NJW1109V uPD78F0511AGA
IC1203 IC1206 IC1402 IC1601 IC1603 IC2206 IC2606
BUS No. Address (Write) Address (Read)
Functions
2
9Ah
9Bh
A/D converter
2
28h
29h
CC DECODER
2
B8h
B9h
Video decoder
1
A2h
A3h
32Kbit EEPROM
1
A0h
D1h
Clock Generator
1
DEh
DFh
Clock Generator
2
80h
81h
Attenuator
1
60h
61h
SUB-CPU
(Applicable to NP216) Circuit symbol
Item name
IC1008
AD9985AKSTZ Z8612912SSG D64012GJ IS24C32C CDCDLP223 CY2427ZXCT NJW1142AV uPD78F0511AGA
IC1203 IC1206 IC1402 IC1601 IC1603 IC2206 IC2606
BUS No. Address (Write) Address (Read)
Functions
2
9Ah
9Bh
A/D converter
2
28h
29h
CC DECODER
2
B8h
B9h
Video decoder
1
A2h
A3h
32Kbit EEPROM
1
A0h
D1h
Clock Generator
1
DEh
DFh
Clock Generator
1
82h
–
Attenuator
1
60h
61h
SUB-CPU
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-5
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 4. A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) Quanitity
Circuit symbol
Type discription
Explanation
1
IC1003
IS24C02D-2ZL1
EEPROM for PLUG & PLAY
1
IC1004
SN74CBT3306
Bus switch
1
IC1006
NJM2581M
6dB Amp
1
IC1008
AD9985AKSTZ
A/D converter
1
IC1203
Z8612912SSG-TR
Closed Caption
1
IC1204
NJM2233BV
Closed Caption
1
IC1206
Upd64012
Video decorder
1
IC1401
DDP2230
Image processor (CPU built-in scaler)
1
IC1402
IS24C232C-2GLI
32Kbit EEPROM
1
IC1601
CDCDLP223
3.3V Clock Synthesizer
1
IC1603
CY24272ZXCT
XDR Clock Generator
1
IC1604
K4Y50084UE
512Mbit XDR DRAM
1
IC1801
DAD2000
Reset IC
1
IC2001
IS62WV12816BLL
2Mbit SRAM
1
IC2004
MX29LV640DBTI
64Mbit Flash memory
1
IC2204
ADM3202ARUZ
R-232C driver
1
IC2206
NJW1109V
Attenuator
1
IC2208
TPA3007D1PW
Audio Amp
1
IC2210
UPC393GR
Comparator
1
IC2602
PMD1000
Power and Motor Driver
1
IC2606
UPD78f0511
SUB-CPU
1
IC2610
TC7WB66FK
BUS Switch
2
IC1002, IC1205
NJM2884U1
Voltage•Regulator
NJM2878F3
Voltage•Regulator
4
IC1001, IC1009, IC1602, IC2609
1
IC1010
TPS60403DBV
Voltage•Regulator
1
IC1202
NJM2882F15
Voltage•Regulator
3
IC2202, IC2403, IC2404 NJM2387ADL3
Voltage•Regulator
1
IC2203
NJM2831F09
Voltage•Regulator
1
IC2607
ST1S10PUR
Voltage•Regulator
2
IC1007, IC2611
R200LD10L
Voltage•Regulator
1
IC901
TSOP34438
Remote Control light Receiver
1
IC902
GP2S27T3
Photo Interrupter
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-6
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION 4. A list of ICs used is shown below (Applicable to NP216) Quanitity
Circuit symbol
Type discription
Explanation
2
IC1003, IC1012
IS24C02D-2ZL1
EEPROM for PLUG & PLAY
2
IC1004, IC1013
SN74CBT3306
Sync Select
1
IC1006
NJM2581M
6dB Amp
1
IC1008
AD9985AKSTZ
A/D converter
1
IC1011
EL4342IL
RGB Select
1
IC1203
Z8612912SSG-TR
Closed Caption
1
IC1204
NJM2233BV
Closed Caption
1
IC1206
Upd64012
Video decorder
1
IC1401
DDP2230
Image processor (CPU built-in scaler)
1
IC1402
IS24C232C-2GLI
32Kbit EEPROM
1
IC1601
CDCDLP223
3.3V Clock Synthesizer
1
IC1603
CY24272ZXCT
XDR Clock Generator
1
IC1604
K4Y50084UE
512Mbit XDR DRAM
1
IC1801
DAD2000
Reset IC
1
IC2001
IS62WV12816BLL
2Mbit SRAM
1
IC2004
MX29LV640DBTI
64Mbit Flash memory
1
IC2204
ADM3202ARUZ
R-232C driver
1
IC2205
SN74CBT3125
BUS Switch
1
IC2206
NJW1142AV
Attenuator
1
IC2208
TPA3007D1PW
Audio Amp
1
IC2210
UPC393GR
Comparator
1
IC2602
PMD1000
Power and Motor Driver
1
IC2606
UPD78F0511
SUB-CPU
1
IC2610
TC7WB66FK
BUS Switch
2
IC1002, IC1205
NJM2884U1
Voltage•Regulator
NJM2878F3
Voltage•Regulator
4
IC1001, IC1009, IC1602, IC2609
1
IC1010
TPS60403DBV
Voltage•Regulator
1
IC1202
NJM2882F15
Voltage•Regulator
3
IC2202, IC2403, IC2404 NJM2387ADL3
Voltage•Regulator
1
IC2203
NJM2831F09
Voltage•Regulator
1
IC2607
ST1S10PUR
Voltage•Regulator
2
IC1007, IC2611
PQ200LD10L
Voltage•Regulator
1
IC801
TSOP34438
Remote Control light Receiver
1
IC802
ITR8307/TR8
Photo Interrupter
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-7
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
NP215s Power Up Sequence
Processing
Device
Status
Remarks
POWER ON
IC2603_6Pin L (0V) IC1401_C18Pin
Cover Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) POLB STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of Once)
↓
“LPHOT” Check
IC2605_3Pin H (+3.3V) IC1401 C25Pin
Temperature Error Displayed for L (0V) POBM STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of Twice)
↓
PWM Initialization
Fan Boot Setup
↓
PS2 : High
IC2605_6Pin L ⇒ H (+3.3V) IC1401_A21Pin
↓
Ballas Uart Mode Setup
Enable Communication command Lamp Sync Type Setup
↓
Fan Data Setup Fan Rotation Start
IC2605_4Pin
L ⇒ H (+3.3V)
↓
Ballast Palament obtain
Precooling for More Than 0.04V POCW STATUS LED : Blinking in Green (1-Second Period)
↓
C/W Motor Data Setup C/W Rotation Start
IC2602
↓
Precool Check IC2408_1Pin +0.04~0.5V
TH2401
↓
Precool Check IC2408_1Pin +0.04~0.5V
POPA
↓
“COVERDET” Check
POWER LED: Lit in Orange ⇒ Lit in Green
Check Point
Precooling for More Than 0.04V STATUS LED : Blinking in Green (1-Second Period)
↓
“FANDET” Check
IC2408_27Pin H (+3.3V) IC1401_B18Pin
Fan Error Displayed for L (0V) POFA STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 4 Times) POFB
C/W Rotation Check ↓
PODB_3Pin IC1401_AD26Pin
Lamp Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) POCW STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times) PODB
LAMPEN : High Lamp Lighting
IC2604_2Pin L ⇒ H (+3.3V) IC1401_AA27Pin
Lamp Light disposition : 200ms wait
PODC_2Pin L (0V) IC1401_AD27Pin
Lamp Error Displayed for H (+3.3V) PODC STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times)
↓
↓
“LAMPFLAG” Check
↓
Lamp Light Status Check ↓
Uart command
I2C READY Check ↓
Lamp Error Displayed for Abnormality STATUS LED: Blinking in Red (Period of 6 Times)
I2C Data Setup
↓ POWER LED: Lit in Green ⇒ Blinking in Green
No Signal Display Setup
PODC
↓ POWER LED: Blinking in Green ⇒ Lit in Green
Normal Operation
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
8-8
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 1. Diagonal view of the main unit front
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-1
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 2. LENS CAP/STRAP W/LAMP COVER ASSY/LAMP SASSY (1) Take out the LENS CAP/STRAP W. (2) Loosen one screw 1 and remove the LAMP COVER ASSY. Loosen three screws 2 of the LAMP SASSY and remove the LAMP SASSY.
LAMP COVER ASSY (NP210) 24FU0791
2 1
LAMP SASSY (Option)
LENS CAP (NP210) 24F45801
STRAP W 24J23901
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-2
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 3. TOP COVER ASSY/DUCT EXT (NP210) (1) Remove the six screws 1 and the four screws 2 and the take out the TOP COVER ASSY. (2) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the DUCT EXT (NP210).
TOP COVER ASSY 9N999251 (NP215/215G) 9N999261 (NP210G) 9N999271 (NP115G) 9N999281 (NP110/110G) 9N999291 (NP215J) 9N999301 (NP210J) 9N999311 (NP115J) 9N999321 (NP110J) 9N999451 (NP216/216G) 9N999461 (NP216J)
2 SRW019
3 SRW006
DUCT EXT (NP210) 24F45761
1 SRW011
1 SRW011
1 SRW011
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
FRONT
2
3
2
2
3
FRONT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-3
METHOD METHOD OF OF DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY 4. MAIN LAN SASSY/MAIN SPK SASSY (1) Remove the two screws 1 and the six screws 2 and take out the MAIN LAN SASSY/MAIN SPK SASSY. 2 SRW016 1 SRW012 2 SRW016
MAIN LAN SASSY MAIN SPK SASSY(Applicable to NP216)
1 2
2
2
2
1
2
2
FRONT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-4
METHOD OF OF DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY METHOD 5-1. Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110 MAINPWB ASSY/LAM PWB ASSY/SPEAKER (1) Remove the two screws 1 and six STUD (D-SUB). Take out the MAIN PWB ASSY. (2) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the LAN PWB ASSY. (3) Remove the two screws 4 and take out the SPEAKER.
BRACKET (I/O) (NP210) 24H66582 4 SRW017
SHIELD (I/O) (NP210) 24H66591 1 SRW013
2 STUD (D-SUB) 2 STUD (D-SUB)
1 SRW013
SPEAKER 6N300029
MAIN PWB ASSY (Refer to P5-16)
3 SRW014
LAN PWB ASSY 81S35N01 (Applicable to NP215 series)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-5
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 5-2. Applicable to NP216 MAIN SASSY/SPEAKER (1) Remove the two screws 4 and take out the SPEAKER. 4 SRW017
MAIN SASSY 81T45FA1 (USA version) 81T46FA1 (USA other than USA version)
SPEAKER 6N300029
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-6
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 6. LENS GUARD (NP210)/SHIELD (DMD) (NP210)/CWC PWB ASSY/ENGINE ASSY (1) Take out the LENS GUARD (NP210). (2) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the SHIELD (DMD) (NP210). (3) Remove the one screw 2 and take out the CWC PWB ASSY. (4) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the ENGINE ASSY.
2 SRW111 1 SRW001
CWC PWB ASSY 81S35FC2 SHIELD (DMD) (NP210) 24H66661
3 SRW001
ENGINE ASSY (Refer to P9-14~P9-18)
LENS GUARD (NP210) 24F45791
3
2
3
1 1
FRONT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-7
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 7. CASE (PS) ASSY) (1) Remove the six screws 1 and take out the CASE (PS) ASSY.
1 SRW010
CASE (PS) ASSY 24FU0801 (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) 24FU0891 (Applicable to NP216)
1
1
1
1
1
1
FRONT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-8
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 8. DC FAN (1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the DC FAN ASSY. (2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the DC FAN.
1 SRW003
DC FAN 3N170148 DUCT LAMP 24F45501
2 SRW115
HOLDER LAMP FAN 24F45551
1
1
FRONT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-9
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 9. COVER PWB ASSY/POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST/DUCT (BS) (NP210)/ CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210) (1) Remove the one screw 1 and take out the COVER PWB ASSY. (2) Remove the four screws 2 and take out the assemblies of POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST/DUCT (BS) (NP210)/CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210). (3) Remove the DUCT (BS) (NP210) and the three screws 3 and take out the POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST.
COVER PWB ASSY 81S35FD2 POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST 3N101351 2 SRW007
1 SRW008 2 SRW007
5 SRW009
3 SRW005
CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210) 24FU0811
DUCT (BS) (NP210) 24F45811
2
2
2 1
2
FRONT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-10
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 10. POWER SUPPLY-DC (1) Remove the one screw 1 and the five screws 2 and take out the POWER SUPPLY-DC.
1 SRW023
2 SRW004
2 SRW004
POWER SUPPLY-DC 3N101341
2 2
2
2
1 2
FRONT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-11
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 11. DC FAN/THERMOSTAT (1) Remove the three screws 1 and take out the DC FAN ASSY. (2) Remove the one screw 2 and take out the THERMOSTAT. (3) Remove the two screws 3 and take out the DC FAN.
3 SRW118
1 SRW003
HOLDER EX-FAN 24F45452 THERMOSTAT 7N970080 DC FAN 3N170147
SPRING BM
2 SRW120
1
1
1
FRONT
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-12
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 12. BOTTOM COVER ASSY
SPRING (FOOT F) 24H66531 FOOT LEVER 24G09301
FOOT R 24F45741 FOOT F 24F44611
SPACER (FOOT R) 24J36881
CUSHION (FOOT F) 24J35431
BOTTOM COVER ASSY 9N999371 (NP215) 9N999381 (NP210) 9N999391 (NP115) 9N999401 (NP110) 9N999481 (NP216)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-13
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 13. FOCUS RING/ZOOM BASE/ZOOM RING/ZOOM LENS (1) Remove the three screws 1 and take out the FOCUS RING. (2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the ZOOM BASE. (3) Take out the ZOOM RING/ZOOM LENS.
ZOOM LENS 12JT4022 ZOOM RING 24F45521
ZOOM BASE 24F45531
2 SRW104
2 SRW104
1 SRW102
FOCUS RING 24F45511
1 SRW102
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-14
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 14. PLATE BL/HOLDER PLATE-BL/PLATE DMD-MASK/DMD/DMD PWB ASSY/ HEATSINK-DMD ASSY (1) Remove the one screw 1 and take out the PLATE BL/HOLDER PLATE-BL. (2) Remove the two screws 2 and take out the PLATE DMD-MASK/DMD/DMD PWB ASSY/HEATSINK-DMD ASSY.
1 SRW105 2 SRW101
HEATSHINK-DMD ASSY 24HS4921 DMD 3N770164 (NP216/215/210) 3N770165 (NP115/110)
SPRING DMD 24H66471
PLATE BL 24H66371
HOLDER PLATE-BL 24F45562 DMD PWB ASSY 81S35FB1 PLATE DMD-MASK 24H66461
3
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-15
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 15. CW SASSY (1) Remove the two screws 1 and take out the CW ASSY. (2) Remove the three screws 2 and take out the COLOR WHEEL. 1 SRW109
2 SRW111
HOLDER CW 24F45542
COLOR WHEEL 12JT3011
1
1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-16
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 16. COVER ENGINE/MIRROR (1) Remove the four screws 1 and take out the assemblies of COVER ENGINE/MIRROR. (2) Remove the SPRING M1 and take out the MIRROR.
1 SRW106
COVER-ENGINE 24F45461 MIRROR 12JT4041
CUSHION (COVER A) 24J24571
SPRING-M1 24H66381
1
1
1
1
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-17
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLY 17. LT SASSY/CONDENSER LENS 1/CONDENSER LENS 2/CONDENSER LENS 3 (1) Remove the two screws 1 and the one screw 2 and the take out the SPRING-LT/PLATE MASK-LT/LT SASSY. (2) Take out the CONDENSER LENS 1/CONDENSER LENS 2/CONDENSER LENS 3. 1 SRW108
CONDENSER LENS 1 12JT4051
2 SRW107
SPRING-LT 24H66401
PLATE MASK-LT 24H66411
CONDENSER LENS 2 12JT4061 3 SRW103
LT-SASSY 82S35131
CONDENSER LENS 3 12JT3952
3 SRW103
1 1
2
3
3
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
9-18
DISASSEMBLY • Main body (Applicable to NP215/NP210/NP115/NP110) SRW016
BRACKET (I/O) (NP210) 24H66582 SRW016
SHIELD (I/O) (NP210) 24H66591
SRW017 STUD (D-SUB)
LAMP COVER ASSY (NP210) 24FU0791
SRW010
SRW013
SRW019
SRW016
STUD (D-SUB)
TOP COVER ASSY 9N999251 (NP215/215G) 9N999261 (NP210G) 9N999271 (NP115G) 9N999281 (NP110/110G) 9N999291 (NP215J) 9N999301 (NP210J) 9N999311 (NP115J) 9N999321 (NP110J)
SRW012 SRW016
CASE (PS) ASSY 24FU0801
SRW016
SRW014
SRW006
SPEAKER 6N300029
MAIN PWB ASSY LAN PWB ASSY (Refer to P5-16) 81S35N01 (Applicable to NP215 series) COVER PWB ASSY 81S35FD2
SRW008
SRW007 SRW007
POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST 3N101351
DUCT EXT (NP210) 24F45761
SRW003
SRW004
HOLDER LAMP FAN 24F45551
LAMP SASSY (Option)
DC FAN 3N170148
SRW023
SRW009 SRW005
SRW004
SRW111 SRW115
CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210) 24FU0811
DUCT (BS) (NP210) 24F45811
SRW003
SRW118
POWER SUPPLY-DC 3N101341
SHIELD (DMD) (NP210) 24H66661
SRW011
SRW001
HOLDER EX-FAN 24F45452 LENS GUARD (NP210) 24F45791
THERMOSTAT 7N970080
DC FAN 3N170147
SRW001
DUCT LAMP 24F45501
SRW005
CWC PWB ASSY 81S35FC2
SPRING BM LENS CAP (NP210) 24F45801
SRW011 SRW120
BOTTOM COVER ASSY 9N999371 (NP215) 9N999381 (NP210) 9N999391 (NP115) 9N999401 (NP110)
SRW011
STRAP W 24J23901
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
10-1
ENGINE ASSY (Refer to P9-14~P9-18)
DISASSEMBLY • Main body (Applicable to NP216) LAMP COVER ASSY (NP210) 24FU0791
SRW010
SRW016
SRW019 SRW012
SRW016
TOP COVER ASSY 9N999451 (NP216/216G) 9N999461 (NP216J)
SRW016 SRW017
SRW016
CASE (PS) ASSY 24FU0891
SPEAKER 6N300029
COVER PWB ASSY 81S35FD2
SRW008
SRW006 MAIN SASSY 81T45FA1 (USA version) 81T46FA1 (NP215 other than USA version)
SRW007 SRW007
POWER SUPPLY-BALLAST 3N101351
DUCT EXT (NP210) 24F45761
SRW003
SRW004
HOLDER LAMP FAN 24F45551
LAMP SASSY (Option)
DC FAN 3N170148
SRW023
SRW009 SRW005
SRW004
SRW111 SRW115
CASE (BS) ASSY (NP210) 24FU0811
DUCT (BS) (NP210) 24F45811
SRW003
SRW118
POWER SUPPLY-DC 3N101341
SHIELD (DMD) (NP210) 24H66661
SRW011
SRW001
HOLDER EX-FAN 24F45452 LENS GUARD (NP210) 24F45791
THERMOSTAT 7N970080
DC FAN 3N170147
SRW001
DUCT LAMP 24F45501
SRW005
CWC PWB ASSY 81S35FC2
SPRING BM LENS CAP (NP210) 24F45801
SRW011 SRW120
BOTTOM COVER ASSY 9N999481 (NP216)
SRW011
STRAP W 24J23901
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
10-2
ENGINE ASSY (Refer to P9-14~P9-18)
DISASSEMBLY • Engine sassy
SRW105 SRW101 HEATSINK-DMD ASSY 24HS4921
PLATE BL 24H66371
DMD 3N770164 (NP216/215/210) 3N770165 (NP115/110)
HOLDER PLATE-BL 24F45562
SPRING DMD 24H66471 CONDENSER LENS 3 12JT3952
DMD PWB ASSY 81S35FB1
ZOOM LENS 12JT4022
SRW109 PLATE DMD-MASK 24H66461
ZOOM RING 24F45521
SRW111 ZOOM BASE 24F45531
CONDENSER LENS 2 12JT4061 COLOR WHEEL 12JT3011
HOLDER CW 24F45542
SRW104
CUSHION (COVER A) 24J24571
CONDENSER LENS 1 12JT4051 LT-SASSY 82S35131
SRW102
MIRROR 12JT4041
SPRING-LT 24H66401
SPRING-M1 24H66381
PLATE MASK-LT 24H66411
SRW107
COVER ENGINE 24F45461 SRW108
SRW106
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
10-3
FOCUS RING 24F45511 SRW102
PACKAGING 1. CARTON BOX (1) Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
1
Part name
Part code
Q'ty
CARTON BOX (NP215)
24MV2911
1
Remarks
• Carton box (NP215) assembly procedures : Bottom plane assembly box (Applicable to U/G/J version)
1
Insert 1pc.
Completion
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-1
PACKAGING 2. CARTON BOX (2) Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
Part name PROTECTION BAG
1
Part code
Q'ty
24M16172
1
2
CARTON BOX (NP215)
24MV2911
1
3
SPACER (NP215)
24MV2901
1
4
SERVICE ENVELOPR SASSY
Remarks
1
• Inser a spacer in the carton box and then the set. (Applicable to U/G version) Enter the set in the protection bag.
Enter a spacer in the carton box.
2
1
Enter a spacer so that its large hollow section is positioned on the left side in the recesses.
3 Put it so that the joint line of the carton box is positioned on the left of this side. Enter the set on the top of the spacer.
Enter the protection sheet (containing accessories)
4 Enter the set so that the lens section is positioned near the large hollow section of the spacer. Enter accessories.
Accommodation order 1 POWER CORD 2 CABLE RGB 3 REM-T HAND UNIT Position for REM-T unit accommodation
1. Position for power cord accommodation • Enter it from the side where no plug is located.
2. Position for cable RGB accommodation • Enter it so that the plug side positioned on this side.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-2
PACKAGING 3. CARTON BOX (3) Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
Part name PROTECTION BAG
1
Part code
Q'ty
24M16172
1
2
CARTON BOX (NP215)
24MV2911
1
3
SPACER (NP215)
24MV2901
1
4
SOFT CASE (NP110)
24BS8021
1
5
SERVICE ENVELOPE SASSY
Remarks
1
• Inser a spacer in the carton box and then the set. (Applicable to J version) Enter a spacer in the carton box.
Enter the set in the protection bag.
1
Enter a spacer so that its large hollow section is positioned on the left side in the recesses.
2 3
Put it so that the joint line of the carton box is positioned on the left of this side. Enter the set on the top of the spacer.
Enter the soft case on the top of the set.
4 Enter the set so that the lens section is positioned near the large hollow section of the spacer.
Enter the soft case so that is lock section is positioned on the lens side.
Enter the carton sheet (containing accessoried).
Enter accessories.
5 Position for REM-T unit accommodation Position for power cord accommodation
Press and crush the convex section of the carton sheet from the right and left toward the center. Position for cable RGB accommodation • Enter ir in the order of Cable REM-T. • Enter it so that the plug side positioned on this side.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-3
PACKAGING 4. CARTON BOX (4) Diagram symbol 1
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q'ty
TYPE, PP 60MM*45M (C)
9R030013
1
TYPE, PP 60MM*50M
92203187
OR
Applicable to U/G version
Remarks
Applicable to J version The direction of the LENS.
Side plate 50~60mm
1
Method of tape adhesion conforms to Type I Adhesion. Tape ashesion on both sides of the center section : Approx. 50mm~60mm
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-4
PACKAGING 5. LABEL (CARTON) Diagram symbol 1
Circuit symbol
Part name LABEL (CARTON) (NP215)
Part code
Q'ty
24L68571
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP215G)
24L68611
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP215J)
24L68941
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP210G)
24L68601
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP210J)
24L68951
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP115)
24L70361
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP115G)
24L68631
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP115J)
24L68961
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP110)
24L68641
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP110G)
24L68651
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP110J)
24L68971
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP216)
24L69771
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP216G)
24L69781
2
1
LABEL (CARTON) (NP216J)
24L70051
2
2
SERIAL LABEL
16761791
1
Remarks
• Stick the label on the carton box. Joint part of the carton box
1
Stick the [label (carton) (NP***)] on the specified position. (2 pcs.) Note : It shall be stuck so that it covers "[ ]" mark printed on the carton box. Stick [serial label] on the specified place. (1 pc.)
2
Note : 1. Stick it after confirm that it is the same No. as the set adhesion. 2. Stick it, adjusted to the printed mark of [", Conceal the "Label" print.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-5
PACKAGING 6. CARTON SHEET Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
Part name CARTON SHEET (NP215)
1
Part code
Q'ty
24MV2891
1
Remarks
• Carton box (NP215) assembly procedures
Fold 4 pcs.
1
Insert 2 pcs.
Fold 2 pcs.
Inset 2 pcs.
J version only, Not folded Fold 4 pcs.
Fold 2 pcs.
Insert 2 pcs.
Inset 2 pcs. • In regard to the accommodation order for accessoried, refer to the next page and thereafter.
Inset 2 pcs. Completed. (Completed after the accessories have been entered.)
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-6
PACKAGING 7. ACCESSORIES (U Version) Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q'ty
Remarks
Applicable to NP216/215/110 Storage order
Part name
Part code
Q'ty
1 2 3 4 5
WARRANTY (US) (PORTABLE) REGISTRATION CARD (USA) C NP216 QUICK GUIDE (U/G) NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (U) NP216 CD-ROM
7N8P9621 7N8P1493 7N8N0731 7N8N0751 7N951471
1 1 1 1 1
• Enter the accessories in the assembled carton sheet according to the descriptions above. In regard to the accommodation order, "1" is put on the top and "5" on the bottom in the carton sheet. * Align the characters so that they are legible correctly. Storage order
Part name REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E LABEL (INSTA CARE) (NP215) POWER CORD U3 L1.8 V BATTERY CARBON (GP24S) AAA CABLE RGB 1.8M JO
A B C
Part code
Q'ty
7N900881 24L68581 7N080236
1 1 1 2 1
7N520052
A: Put the REM-T hand unit RD-443E on the spacer in the right recesses of the set. B: Put the power cord on the spacer in the left recesses of the set. C: Put the RGB cable on the spacer on the right side of this side of the set. Insert the battery carbon (GP24S) AAA in the bag of the cable RGB 1.8M. * For all of A, B, and C, no directions are specified. Lens position A B
C A • Confirm all safety marks of the power code. •
Stick the label (insta care) (NP215) on the back of the REM-T HAND unit RD-445E bag with the cello tape 12W*35M. (Use the tape by cutting approx. 30~50mm) Stick the Lable (insta care) (NP215) as face its back side.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-7
PACKAGING 8. ACCESSORIES (G Version) Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q'ty
Remarks
Applicable to NP216/NP215G/210G/115G/110G Storage order 1 2 3 4 5
Part name NP216 QUICK GUIDE (U/G) NP216 QUICK GUIDE (G2) NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (G) NP216 IMPORTANT INFO (U) NP216 CD-ROM
Part code
Q'ty
7N8N0731 7N8N0741 7N8N0761 7N8N0751 7N951471
1 1 1 1 1
• Enter the accessories in the assembled carton sheet according to the descriptions above. In regard to the accommodation order, "1" is put on the top and "5" on the bottom in the carton sheet. * Align the characters so that they are legible correctly. Storage order A B C
Part name REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E POWER CORD U3 L1.8 10A V BATTERY CARBON (GP24S) AAA CABLE RGB 1.8M JO
Part code
Q'ty
7N900881 7N080022
1 1 2 1
7N520052
A: Put the REM-T hand unit RD-443E on the spacer in the right recesses of the set. B: Put the power cord on the spacer in the left recesses of the set. C: Put the RGB cable on the spacer on the right side of this side of the set. Insert the battery carbon (GP24S) AAA in the bag of the cable RGB 1.8M. * For all of A, B, and C, no directions are specified. * For all of A, B, and C, the position for accommodatation identical with that for the service envelope SASSY of the U version. • Confirm all safety marks of the power code.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-8
PACKAGING 9. ACCESSORIES (J Version) Diagram symbol
Circuit symbol
Part name
Part code
Q'ty
Remarks
Applicable to NP216J/215J/210J/115J/110J SERVICE ENVELOPE SASSY Part name
Storage order 1 2 3 4 5
PROJECTOR WARRANTY (SHEET) NP216 QUICK FUIDE (J) NP216 U/M (ABR EDITION) (J) NP216 CD-ROM VLC REGISTRATION (C)
Part code
Q'ty
7N8P7491 7N8N0951 7N8N0941 7N951471 7N8P0975
1 1 1 1 1
• Enter the accessories in the assembled carton sheet according to the descriptions above. In regard to the accommodation order, "1" is put on the top and "5" on the bottom in the carton sheet. * Align the characters so that they are legible correctly. Part name
Storage order A B
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-444J POWER CORD J3 L3.0 7A V BATTERY CARBON (GP24S) AAA CABLE RGB 1.8M JO SOFT CASE (NP110)
C D
Part code
Q'ty
7N900891 7N080125
1 1 2 1 1
7N520052 24BS8021
A: Put the REM-T hand unit RD-443E on the spacer in the right recesses of the set. B: Put the power cord on the spacer in the left recesses of the set. C: Put the RGB cable on the spacer on the right side of this side of the set. Insert the battery carbon (GP24S) AAA in the bag of the cable RGB 1.8M. * For all of A, B, and C, no directions are specified. Lens position
A
B D
C
• Confirm all safety marks of the power code.
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
11-9
PART LIST SPARE PART LIST NP216/NP215/NP115/NP110 ITEM
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
12JT3011
COLOR WHEEL(PA70)
2
12JT4023
ZOOM LENS(PA91)
3
24F44611
FOOT F(PB90)
4
24F45511
FOCUS_RING(PA91)
5
24F45521
ZOOM_RING(PA91)
6
24F45531
ZOOM_BASE(PA91)
7
24F45542
HOLDER_CW(PA91)
8
24F45741
FOOT R(NP210)
PHOTO(or art work)
REMARK
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-1
PART LIST
9
24F45761
DUCT EXT(NP210)
10
24F45791
LENS GUARD(NP210)
11
24F45801
LENS CAP(NP210)
12
24FU0791
LAMP COVER ASSY(NP210)
13
24J23901
STRAP W
14
24J35431
CUSHION (FOOT F)(PB90)
15
24L46401
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
24L69771
LABEL (CARTON)(NP216)
24L68571
LABEL(CARTON)(NP215)
NP215 ONLY
24L70361
LABEL(CARTON)(NP115)
NP115 ONLY
24L68641
LABEL(CARTON)(NP110)
NP110 ONLY
24L68581
LABEL(INSTA CARE)(NP215)
(example:NP215)
NP216 ONLY
16
17
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-2
PART LIST
18
24M16172
PROTECTION BAG
19
24MV2891 CARTON SHEET(NP215)
20
24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
21
24MV2911 CARTON BOX(NP215)
22
3N101341
POWER SUPPLY-DC PA91
23
3N101351
POWERSUPPLY-BALLAST PA91
24
3N170147
DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
25
3N170148
DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
3N770164
MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9)
NP215/NP216 ONLY
3N770165
MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9)
NP110/NP115 ONLY
26
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-3
PART LIST
27
6N300029
SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K
28
7N080236
POWER CORD U3 L1.8 V
29
7N520052
CABLE RGB 1.8M JO
30
7N8P1493
REGISTRATION CARD(USA)C
31
7N8P9621
WARRANTY(US)(PORTABLE)
32
7N8N0731 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
33
7N8N0751 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(U)
34
7N900881
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E
35
7N951471
NP216 CD-ROM
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-4
PART LIST
36
7N970080
THERMOSTAT UP62G-90 L130B
MAIN PWB ASSY
NP215/NP115/NP110 ONLY In regard to the part numbers, refer to Method of Adjustments on P5-16.
81T45FA1
MAIN SASSY
NP216 ONLY
38
81S35FB1
DMD PWB ASSY
39
81S35FC1 CWC PWB ASSY
40
81S35FD1 COVER PWB ASSY
41
82S35131
LT_SASSY
9N999452
TOP COVER ASSY(NP216)
NP216 ONLY
9N999251
TOP COVER ASSY(NP215)
NP215 ONLY
9N999272
TOP COVER ASSY(NP115)
NP115 ONLY
9N999281
TOP COVER ASSY(NP110)
NP110 ONLY
9N999481
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216)
NP216 ONLY
9N999371
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP215)
NP215 ONLY
9N999391
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP115)
NP115 ONLY
9N999401
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP110)
NP110 ONLY
37
42
43
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-5
PART LIST
44
81S35N01
LAN_PWB PWB ASSY
NP215 ONLY
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-6
PART LIST SPARE PART LIST NP216G/NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G ITEM
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
12JT3011
COLOR WHEEL(PA70)
2
12JT4023
ZOOM LENS(PA91)
3
24F44611
FOOT F(PB90)
4
24F45511
FOCUS_RING(PA91)
5
24F45521
ZOOM_RING(PA91)
6
24F45531
ZOOM_BASE(PA91)
7
24F45542
HOLDER_CW(PA91)
8
24F45741
FOOT R(NP210)
PHOTO(or art work)
REMARK
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-7
PART LIST
9
24F45761
DUCT EXT(NP210)
10
24F45791
LENS GUARD(NP210)
11
24F45801
LENS CAP(NP210)
12
24FU0791
LAMP COVER ASSY(NP210)
13
24J23901
STRAP W
14
24J35431
CUSHION (FOOT F)(PB90)
15
24L46401
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
24L69781
LABEL (CARTON)(NP216G)
24L68611
LABEL(CARTON)(NP215G)
NP215G ONLY
24L68601
LABEL(CARTON)(NP210G)
NP210G ONLY
24L68631
LABEL(CARTON)(NP115G)
NP115G ONLY
24L68651
LABEL(CARTON)(NP110G)
NP110G ONLY
24M16172
PROTECTION BAG
16
17
(example:NP215)
NP216G ONLY
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-8
PART LIST
18
24MV2891 CARTON SHEET(NP215)
19
24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
20
24MV2911 CARTON BOX(NP215)
21
3N101341
POWER SUPPLY-DC PA91
22
3N101351
POWERSUPPLY-BALLAST PA91
23
3N170147
DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
24
3N170148
DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
3N770164
MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9)
NP216G/NP215G/NP210G ONLY
3N770165
MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9)
NP115G/NP110G ONLY
6N300029
SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K
25
26
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-9
PART LIST
27
7N080022
POWER CORD E3 L1.8 10A V
28
7N520052
CABLE RGB 1.8M JO
29
7N8N0731 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(U/G)
30
7N8N0741 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(G2)
31
7N8N0751 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(U)
32
7N8N0761 NP216 IMPORTANT INFO(G)
33
7N900881
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E
34
7N951471
NP216 CD-ROM
35
7N970080
THERMOSTAT UP62G-90 L130B
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-10
PART LIST
MAIN PWB ASSY
NP215G/NP210G/NP115G/NP110G ONLY In regard to the part numbers, refer to Method of Adjustments on P5-16.
81T46FA1
MAIN SASSY
NP216G ONLY
37
81S35FB1
DMD PWB ASSY
38
81S35FC1 CWC PWB ASSY
39
81S35FD1 COVER PWB ASSY
40
82S35131
LT_SASSY
9N999452
TOP COVER ASSY(NP216)
NP216G ONLY
9N999251
TOP COVER ASSY(NP215)
NP215G ONLY
9N999261
TOP COVER ASSY(NP210)
NP210G ONLY
9N999271
TOP COVER ASSY(NP115)
NP115G ONLY
9N999281
TOP COVER ASSY(NP110)
NP110G ONLY
9N999481
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216)
NP216G ONLY
9N999371
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP215)
NP215G ONLY
9N999381
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP210)
NP210G ONLY
9N999391
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP115)
NP115G ONLY
9N999401
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP110)
NP110G ONLY
81S35N01
LAN_PWB PWB ASSY
NP215G ONLY
36
41
42
43
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-11
PART LIST SPARE PART LIST NP216J/NP215J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J ITEM
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
12JT3011
COLOR WHEEL(PA70)
2
12JT4023
ZOOM LENS(PA91)
24BS8021
SOFT CASE(NP100)
3
24F44611
FOOT F(PB90)
4
24F45511
FOCUS_RING(PA91)
5
24F45521
ZOOM_RING(PA91)
6
24F45531
ZOOM_BASE(PA91)
7
24F45542
HOLDER_CW(PA91)
PHOTO(or art work)
REMARK
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-12
PART LIST
8
24F45741
FOOT R(NP210)
9
24F45761
DUCT EXT(NP210)
10
24F45791
LENS GUARD(NP210)
11
24F45801
LENS CAP(NP210)
12
24FU0791
LAMP COVER ASSY(NP210)
13
24J23901
STRAP W
14
24J35431
CUSHION (FOOT F)(PB90)
15
24L46401
CAUTION LABEL(SERVICE)
24L70051
LABEL (CARTON)(NP216J)
24L68941
LABEL(CARTON)(NP215J)
NP215J ONLY
24L68951
LABEL(CARTON)(NP210J)
NP210J ONLY
24L68961
LABEL(CARTON)(NP115J)
NP115J ONLY
24L68971
LABEL(CARTON)(NP110J)
NP110J ONLY
16
(example:NP215)
NP216J ONLY
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-13
PART LIST
17
24M16172
PROTECTION BAG
18
24MV2891 CARTON SHEET(NP215)
19
24MV2901 SPACER (NP215)
20
24MV2911 CARTON BOX(NP215)
21
3N101341
POWER SUPPLY-DC PA91
22
3N101351
POWERSUPPLY-BALLAST PA91
23
3N170147
DCFAN T80T12MS10A7-52J72
24
3N170148
DCFAN BM4520-04W-B39-LB1
3N770164
MOS .55XGA S450 DMD(-9)
NP216J/NP215J/NP210J ONLY
3N770165
MOS .55SVGA S450 DMD(-9)
NP115J/NP1110J ONLY
25
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-14
PART LIST
26
6N300029
SP 50X50 12H 7W L80K
27
7N080125
POWER CORD J3 L3.0 7A V
28
7N520052
CABLE RGB 1.8M JO
29
7N8P0975
VLC REGISTRATION(C)
30
7N8P7491
PROTECTOR WARRANTY(SHEET)
31
7N8N0951 NP216 QUICK GUIDE(J)
32
7N8N0941 NP216 U/M(ABR EDITION)(J)
33
7N900881
REM-T HAND UNIT RD-443E
34
7N951471
NP216 CD-ROM
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-15
PART LIST
35
7N970080
THERMOSTAT UP62G-90 L130B
MAIN PWB ASSY
NP216J/NP210J/NP115J/NP110J ONLY In regard to the part numbers, refer to Method of Adjustments on P5-16.
81T45FA1
MAIN SASSY
NP216J ONLY
37
81S35FB1
DMD PWB ASSY
38
81S35FC1 CWC PWB ASSY
39
81S35FD1 COVER PWB ASSY
40
82S35131
LT_SASSY
9N999462
TOP COVER ASSY(NP216J)
NP216J ONLY
9N999291
TOP COVER ASSY(NP215J)
NP215J ONLY
9N999301
TOP COVER ASSY(NP210J)
NP210J ONLY
9N999311
TOP COVER ASSY(NP115J)
NP115J ONLY
9N999321
TOP COVER ASSY(NP110J)
NP110J ONLY
9N999481
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP216)
NP216J ONLY
9N999371
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP215)
NP215J ONLY
9N999381
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP215)
NP210J ONLY
9N999391
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP115)
NP115J ONLY
9N999401
BOTTOM COVER ASSY(NP110)
NP110J ONLY
36
41
42
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-16
PART LIST
43
81S35N01
LAN_PWB PWB ASSY
NP215J ONLY
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
12-17
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NP215s CONNECTION DIAGRAM CWC PWB (PWC 4719C) P3P3V GND CWINDEX RA 3.3VSCP
1 2 3 4 5
PODB2 2.0mm 5P (05P-SAN) 7NH5W001 1685-28 50mm
180mm
3443-28
Color Wheel Unit Air Flow
DET PWB (PWC 4719D)
135mm
Sirocco
3443-28 115mm
1 2
Lamp House 79mm
POLB2 2.0mm 2P (02P-SJN) 7NH2W002 1061-28 160mm
3266-24
BIMETAL 90∞C/60∞C
130mm
1685-26 80mm
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2F-1*)
3239O-2
130mm
P3P3V GND CWINDEX RA 3.3VSCP
PODB 1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS) 7N400514
1 2 3 4
OUTA OUTB OUTC CENTER
POCW 1.0mm 4P (04FMN-BMTR-A-TB(LF)(SN)) 7N400624
1 2 3
VCC_FANB GND FANB TACH
1 2 3
VCC_FANA GND FANA TACH
1 2 X** 3 1.25mm 5P 4 (SM05B-GHS-TB) X** 5 3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH)
BALLAST POWER SUPPLY UNIT
1061-28 200mm
DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT
PO** 2.0mm 7P (B7B-PH-K-S)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1061-24 105mm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1685-26 55mm
POFB 1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS) 7N400512 POFA 1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS) 7N400512 POLB 1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS) 7N400511
1 2
GND COVERDE
1 2
PS_OUT PS_IN
1 2
AUD+ AUD-
1 2 3 4 5
LAMP_DET/RXD GND VCSM+3.3V LAMP_EN/SCI LAMP_PW/TXD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VCCS+6.5V GND VCCS+15 VCCS+15 GND GND PFC_ON
POF01 1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003) 7N400625
MAIN PWB (PWC 4719A)
POBM 2.0mm 2P (A2001WR0-2PS) 7N400351
POSP 1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS) 7N400511
PODC 1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS) 7N400514
175mm+ (Core)
PO** 3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+3.3V GND TXD RXD RESET FWRITE INIT
LAN PWB (PWC 4695) Applicable to NP215
DMD PWB (PWC 4719B)
7W SPEAKER
X** 3.96mm 4P (B2P4-VH)
1015-22
+3.3V GND TXD RXD RESET FWRITE INIT
1 2 3 4 5
3239O-20
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2M-1*) LAMP UNIT
POLA 2.0mm 7P (07P-SAN) 7NW7W032
PORJ 1.5mm 7P (A1501WV0-7PS) 7N400516
POPA 2.0mm 7P (A2001WR0-7PS) 7N400502
1 3 • • • • • • • • • • • 75 77
2 4 • • • • • • • Card • Edge • • • 76 78
1 3 • • • • • • • • • • • 75 77
2 4 • • • • • • • • • • • 76 78
2 VCC2 1 P3P3V 4 GND 3 P3P3V 6 GND 5 GND 8 MBRST[7] 7 MBRST[8] 10 MBRST[6] 9 MBRST[9] 11 MBRST[10] 12 MBRST[5] 13 MBRST[11] 14 MBRST[4] 15 MBRST[12] 16 MBRST[3] 17 MBRST[13] 18 MBRST[2] 19 MBRST[14] 20 MBRST[1] 21 MBRST[15] 22 MBRST[0] 24 GND 23 GND 25 SSP0_TXD 26 27 SSP0_RXD SSP0_CSZ1 28 29 GND 31 SSP0_CLK EXT_ARSTZ 30 GND 33 GND 32 GND 35 DDB_P_1 34 GND 37 DDB_N_1 36 DDB_P_0 39 DDB_P_3 38 DDB_N_0 41 DDB_N_3 40 DDB_P_2 43 GND 42 DDB_N_2 45 SCB_P 44 GND 47 SCB_N 46 DCKB_P 49 DDB_P_5 48 DCKB_N 51 DDB_N_5 50 DDB_P_4 53 DDB_P_7 52 DDB_N_4 55 DDB_N_7 54 DDB_P_6 57 DDA_P_6 56 DDB_N_6 59 DDA_N_6 58 DDA_P_7 61 DDA_P_4 60 DDA_N_7 63 DDA_N_4 62 DDA_P_5 65 GND 64 DDA_N_5 67 SCA_P 66 GND 69 SCA_N 68 DCKA_P 71 DDA_P_2 70 DCKA_N 73 DDA_N_2 72 DDA_P_3 75 DDA_P_0 77 DDA_N_0 74 DDA_N_3 76 DDA_P_1 78 DDA_N_1
POF02 1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003-PCB) -NC-
"Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC"
13-1
CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NP216 CONNECTION DIAGRAM
POLA PORJ 1.5mm 7P (A1501W0-7PS) 7N400551
PODB2 CWC PWB (PWC 4719C) P3P3V GND (PWC 4732C) CWINDEX RA 3.3VSCP
1 2 3 4 5
2.0mm 5P (05P-SAN) 7NH5W001 1685-28 50mm
1 2 3 4 5
P3P3V GND CWINDEX RA 3.3VSCP
PODB 1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS) 7N400549
+3.3V GND TXD RXD RESET FWRITE INIT
2.0mm 7P (07P-SAN) 7NW7W032
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1685-26 55mm
180mm
3443-28
Color Wheel Unit
135mm
Sirocco
3443-28
Air Flow
115mm
OUTA OUTB OUTC CENTER
POCW
1 2 3
VCC_FANB GND FANB_TACH
1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS) 7N400547
1 2 3
VCC_FANA GND FANA_TACH
1.5mm 3P (A1501WV0-3PS) 7N400547
POFB
DET PWB (PWC 4719D) (PWC 4732D)
1 2
160mm
MAIN PWB (PWC 4732A) 1 2
GND COVERDET
1 2
PS_OUT PS_IN
1 2
AUD+ AUD-
POF01 1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003) 7N400625
POLB 1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS) 7N400546
1 3 • • • • • • • • • • • •
Lamp House 79mm
3266-24
BIMETAL
130mm
90°C/60°C
POBM 2.0mm 2P (A2001WR0-2PS) 7N400351
3239O-20 5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2M-1*)
1685-26
LAMP UNIT
80mm
5.4mm 2P (PCL-P*2F-1*) 3239O-2
BALLAST POWER SUPPLY UNIT
X** 1.25mm 5P (SM05B-GHS-TB)
1 2 3 4 5
1061-28 200mm
1 2 3 4 5
LAMP_DET/RXD GND VCSM+3.3V LAMP_EN/SCI LAMP_PW/TXD
PODC 1.5mm 5P (A1501WV0-5PS) 7N400549
175mm+α (Core)
PO**
PO**
3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH)
2.0mm 7P (B7B-PH-K-S)
DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT
2 4 • • • • • • • • • • • •
75 76 77 78
X** 3.96mm 3P (B2P3-VH) 1015-22
POSP 1.5mm 2P (A1501WV0-2PS) 7N400546
130mm
X** 3.96mm 4P (B2P4-VH)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1061-24 105mm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
VCCS+6.5V GND VCCS+15 VCCS+15 GND GND PFC_ON
1 R_OUT 3 G_OUT 5 B_OUT 7 V_OUT 9 H_OUT 11 RXD_P 13 TXD_P 15 J_SW 17 A_R_OUT 19 A_L_OUT
2 GND 4 GND 6 GND 8 GND 10 GND 12 GND 14 GND 16 GND 18 GND 20 GND
DMD PWB (PWC 4719B) (PWC 4732B)
POFA
POLB2 2.0mm 2P (02P-SJN) 7NH2W002 1061-28
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1.0mm 4P (04FMN-BMTR-A-TB(LF)(SN)) 7N400624
LAN PWB (PWC 4695)
IO PWB (PWC 4733)
POMI 2.0mm 20P 1 2 3 4
+3.3V GND TXD RXD RESET FWRITE INIT
POPA 2.0mm 7P (A2001WR0-7PS) 7N400356
Card Edge
2 VCC2 4 GND 6 GND 8 MBRST[7] 10 MBRST[6] 1 2 12 MBRST[5] 3 4 14 MBRST[4] • • 16 MBRST[3] • • 18 MBRST[2] • • 20 MBRST[1] • • 22 MBRST[0] • • 24 GND • • 26 SSP0_CSZ1 • • 28 • • EXT_ARSTZ • • 30 GND • • 32 GND • • 34 GND 36 DDB_P_0 • • 38 DDB_N_0 75 76 40 DDB_P_2 77 78 42 DDB_N_2 44 GND 46 DCKB_P 48 DCKB_N 50 DDB_P_4 52 DDB_N_4 54 DDB_P_6 56 DDB_N_6 58 DDA_P_7 60 DDA_N_7 62 DDA_P_5 64 DDA_N_5 66 GND 68 DCKA_P 70 DCKA_N 72 DDA_P_3 74 DDA_N_3 76 DDA_P_1 POF02 1.0mm 78P (PC78E66BBA003-PCB) 78 DDA_N_1 1 P3P3V 3 P3P3V 5 GND 7 MBRST[8] 9 MBRST[9] 11 MBRST[10] 13 MBRST[11] 15 MBRST[12] 17 MBRST[13] 19 MBRST[14] 21 MBRST[15] 23 GND 25 SSP0_TXD 27 SSP0_RXD 29 GND 31 SSP0_CLK 33 GND 35 DDB_P_1 37 DDB_N_1 39 DDB_P_3 41 DDB_N_3 43 GND 45 SCB_P 47 SCB_N 49 DDB_P_5 51 DDB_N_5 53 DDB_P_7 55 DDB_N_7 57 DDA_P_6 59 DDA_N_6 61 DDA_P_4 63 DDA_N_4 65 GND 67 SCA_P 69 SCA_N 71 DDA_P_2 73 DDA_N_2 75 DDA_P_0 77 DDA_N_0
-NC-
"Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC"
13-2
BLOCK DIAGRAM
NP215s BLOCK DIAGRAM Computer OUT
MAIN PWB
IC1006 NJM2581M 6dB Amp.
V H IC1004 SN74CBT3306 BUS SWITCH
Computer IN V SYNC H SYNC
V H
RGB/YUV AD9883 A/D CONVERTER
RGB or COMPONENT
IC1003 TC9WMB1FK P&P
CLK/HS/VS
CLK,HS,VS
KEY MATRIX
I2C
VIDEO IN IC1204 NJM2233BV Sig. SEL (Option)
CVBS
IC1203 Z8612912SSG Closed Caption (Option)
IC2004 M29W640GB FLASH ROM
CLK,HD,VD
µ PD64012 VIDEO DECODER
IC1402 M24C32 32K EEPROM
24.576MHz
KEY/LED
16
IC1401 I2CS
DDP2230
IC2001 CY62137FV30 SRAM
400MHz
IC1603 CDCD5704 XCG
320MHz
S-VIDEO IN
DET PWB LAMP COVER SW
LDE
YUV
IC1206
2X LVDS DMD Series450
IC1801 DAD2000 DMD CONTROL
RGB/ YUV
IC1008
DMD PWB
LVDS 20pair
IC1601 CDCDLP223
20MHz
I2CS
100MHz
SV-Y SV-C IC2204 ADM3202 RS-232C DRIVER
PC CONTROL
IC1604 EDX5116ACSE XDR DRAM
RXD/TXD PreCooling Cir.
Therm. (Exhaust)
20MHz
RESET
RXD/TXD Therm. (Intake)
IC2205 SN74CBT3125 BUS SWITCH (Option)
IC2402/5 AMC6821 FAN Control (Back up)
ADC ADC ADC
IC2606 uPD78F0511 SUB CPU
I2C BEEP IC2208 TPA3007D1PW Audio Amp. +/-
rpm*2
PWM*2
IC2206 NJW1109V Attenuator
IC2602 PMD1000
BALLAST Control
+12V
AUDIO IN L/R
BIMETAL
IC2601 PQ200WNA ENABLE Reg.
POWER KEY
RXD/TXD
IC2210 UPC393GR COMPARATOR
IR
Drive Circuit i t
+15V
+15V
IR
FANA LAN PWB (Option)
SPEAKER 7W
N
FANB
CWC-REM PWB
"Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC"
14-1
PS/BALLAST
+6.5V
LAMP UNIT
BLOCK DIAGRAM
NP216 BLOCK DIAGRAM MAIN PWB
VCCS+5V
Computer IN 2
H2 SYNC V2 SYNC
V SYNC
IC1004 SN74CBT3306C SYNC SEL.
RGB2
H1 SYNC V1 SYNC
RGB/YUV
IC1011 EL4342IL RGB SEL.
RGB1
LED
IC1401 DDP2230
YUV IC1206 PD64012 VIDEO DECODER
SV-Y SV-C
IC1204 NJM2233BV Sig. SEL (Option)
L/R IN
Video Audio_In
CLK/HS/VS
CLK/HS /VS I2CS2
CVBS
S-VIDEO IN
IC1203 Z8612912SSG Closed Caption (Option)
KEY MATRIX
RGB/YUV
IC1008 AD9985AKSTZ A/D CONVERTER
IC1003 IS24C02D P&P
VIDEO IN
IC1801 DAD2000 DMDCONTROL
RGB_SEL1
VCCS+5V
Computer IN1
IC2004 MX29LV640DBTI FLASH ROM
CLK/HD/VD
400MHz IC2001 CY62137FV30 SRAM
IC1402 M24C32 32K EEPROM
24.576MHz
I2CS
IC1603 CDCD5704 XCG
320MHz
I2CS2
L/R IN1
Computer2 Audio_In
L/R IN2
I2CS 20MHz
IC2206 NJW1142V Attenuator
IC1604 K4Y50084UE XDR DRAM
L : JACK_IN/ H: JACK_OFF
Pre-Cooling Cir.
IC2607 ST1S10PUR
Computer OUT IC1006 NJM2581M 6dB Amp.
IC2205 SN74CBT3125 BUS SWITCH
Therm. (Intake)
IC2610 TC7WB66FK
RXD/TXD
DC
A_MUTE2 Therm. (Exhaust)
IC2602 PMD1000 ADC ADC IC2606 uPD78F0511 SUB CPU
BALLAST Control
ADC
Audio_Out
GND: 10
IC2208 TPA3007D1PW Audio Amp.
+/-
+12V IC2601 PQ200WNA Reg.
Tr rpm*2
RXD/TXD
I2CS
PWM*2
IC2204 ADM3202 RS-232C DRIVER
RXD/TXD
PC CONTROL
A_MUTE
I2C SW
IO PWB
100HMz
IC1601 CDCDLP223
20MHz
BEEP Computer1 Audio_In
2X LVDS DMD Series450
H SYNC
IC1013 SN74CBT3306C SYNC SEL.
IC1012 IS24C02D P&P
DMD PWB
LVDS 20pair
RGB_SEL2
+15V +15V
ENABLE POWER KEY
IR
J_SW Tr L/R OUT
Tr
L/R OUT
Drive Circuit
A_MUTE2
SPEAKER 7W
"Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC"
14-2
+6.5V IC2210 UPC393GR COMPARATOR
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-2
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-3
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-4
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-5
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-6
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-7
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-8
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-9
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-11
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-12
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-13
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-14
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-15
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-16
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-17
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-18
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-19
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-20
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-21
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-22
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-23
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-24
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-25
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-26
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
“Confidential, Do Not Duplicate without written authorization from NEC.”
15-27
